[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025009823A1 - Method for performing relay communication and device therefor in wireless communication system - Google Patents

Method for performing relay communication and device therefor in wireless communication system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025009823A1
WO2025009823A1 PCT/KR2024/009203 KR2024009203W WO2025009823A1 WO 2025009823 A1 WO2025009823 A1 WO 2025009823A1 KR 2024009203 W KR2024009203 W KR 2024009203W WO 2025009823 A1 WO2025009823 A1 WO 2025009823A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
relay
hop
hop connection
rlf
connection
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/KR2024/009203
Other languages
French (fr)
Korean (ko)
Inventor
백서영
이승민
박기원
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
LG Electronics Inc
Original Assignee
LG Electronics Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by LG Electronics Inc filed Critical LG Electronics Inc
Publication of WO2025009823A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025009823A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W40/00Communication routing or communication path finding
    • H04W40/02Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing
    • H04W40/22Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing using selective relaying for reaching a BTS [Base Transceiver Station] or an access point
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W40/00Communication routing or communication path finding
    • H04W40/24Connectivity information management, e.g. connectivity discovery or connectivity update
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W40/00Communication routing or communication path finding
    • H04W40/34Modification of an existing route
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/14Direct-mode setup
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/18Management of setup rejection or failure
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00Network data management
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/02Terminal devices
    • H04W88/04Terminal devices adapted for relaying to or from another terminal or user
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W92/00Interfaces specially adapted for wireless communication networks
    • H04W92/16Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices
    • H04W92/18Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices between terminal devices

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a method for performing relay communication based on multi-hop by a relay terminal in a wireless communication system and a device therefor.
  • a wireless communication system is a multiple access system that supports communication with multiple users by sharing available system resources (e.g., bandwidth, transmission power, etc.).
  • multiple access systems include a CDMA (code division multiple access) system, an FDMA (frequency division multiple access) system, a TDMA (time division multiple access) system, an OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access) system, an SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access) system, and an MC-FDMA (multi carrier frequency division multiple access) system.
  • SL refers to a communication method that establishes a direct link between user equipment (UE) to directly exchange voice or data between terminals without going through a base station (BS).
  • UE user equipment
  • BS base station
  • SL is being considered as a solution to solve the burden on base stations due to rapidly increasing data traffic.
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything refers to a communication technology that exchanges information with other vehicles, pedestrians, and objects with built-in infrastructure through wired/wireless communication.
  • V2X can be divided into four types: V2V (vehicle-to-vehicle), V2I (vehicle-to-infrastructure), V2N (vehicle-to-network), and V2P (vehicle-to-pedestrian).
  • V2X communication can be provided through the PC5 interface and/or the Uu interface.
  • Figure 1 is a diagram for explaining and comparing V2X communication based on RAT before NR and V2X communication based on NR.
  • V2X messages may include location information, dynamic information, attribute information, etc.
  • a terminal may transmit a CAM of a periodic message type and/or a DENM of an event triggered message type to another terminal.
  • CAM may include basic vehicle information such as vehicle dynamic status information such as direction and speed, vehicle static data such as dimensions, exterior lighting status, and route history.
  • the terminal may broadcast CAM, and the latency of the CAM may be less than 100ms.
  • the terminal may generate DENM and transmit it to other terminals.
  • all vehicles within the transmission range of the terminal may receive CAM and/or DENM.
  • DENM may have a higher priority than CAM.
  • V2X scenarios have been proposed in NR in relation to V2X communication.
  • various V2X scenarios may include vehicle platooning, advanced driving, extended sensors, and remote driving.
  • vehicles can dynamically form a group and move together. For example, in order to perform platoon operations based on vehicle platooning, vehicles belonging to the group can receive periodic data from the lead vehicle. For example, vehicles belonging to the group can use the periodic data to reduce or increase the gap between vehicles.
  • the vehicles can be semi-autonomous or fully automated.
  • each vehicle can adjust its trajectories or maneuvers based on data acquired from local sensors of nearby vehicles and/or nearby logical entities.
  • each vehicle can share driving intentions with nearby vehicles.
  • raw data or processed data, or live video data acquired through local sensors can be exchanged between vehicles, logical entities, pedestrian terminals, and/or V2X application servers.
  • the vehicle can perceive the environment better than it can perceive using its own sensors.
  • a remote driver or V2X application can operate or control the remote vehicle.
  • cloud computing-based driving can be used to operate or control the remote vehicle.
  • access to a cloud-based back-end service platform can be considered for remote driving.
  • the technical problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a method for performing relay communication more accurately and efficiently.
  • a method for a first relay terminal to perform multi-hop based relaying in a wireless communication system may include: forming a first hop connection and a second hop connection for the multi-hop based relaying; monitoring whether an RLF (Radio Link Failure) occurs for the first hop connection or the second hop connection; and triggering a reselection procedure of a relay terminal for one of the first hop connection and the second hop connection based on the occurrence of an RLF for the one hop connection.
  • RLF Radio Link Failure
  • the first relay terminal is characterized in that it reports RLF detection information for RLF detection of the one hop connection through the hop connection in which the RLF is not detected among the first hop connection and the second hop connection.
  • the RLF detection information is characterized by including a value of a hop number corresponding to the one hop connection.
  • the RLF detection information is reported via a release message for releasing a hop connection in which the RLF is not detected, and the release message is characterized in that the detection of the RLF is set as a cause value.
  • the reselection procedure of the relay terminal is not triggered based on the fact that a hop connection in which the RLF is not detected among the first hop connection and the second hop connection is formed with the source remote terminal or the network.
  • the first relay terminal is characterized in that it reports information about the occurrence of RLF of the one hop connection to the source remote terminal or the network.
  • the method further comprises a step of re-establishing the one-hop connection with a new relay terminal through a re-selection procedure of the relay terminal; and a step of reporting information on the re-establishment of the one-hop connection through a hop connection in which the RLF is not detected among the first hop connection and the second hop connection.
  • information on the re-establishment of said one-hop connection is characterized in that it is reported only when the total number of hops for said multi-hop based relay increases due to the re-establishment of said one-hop connection.
  • the multi-hop based relay is characterized as a U2N (User equipment to Network) relay for transmitting and receiving data between a remote terminal and a network.
  • U2N User equipment to Network
  • the multi-hop based relay is characterized as a U2U (User equipment to User equipment) relay for transmitting and receiving data between a source remote terminal and a target remote terminal.
  • U2U User equipment to User equipment
  • a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having recorded thereon instructions for performing the method for performing the multi-hop based relay described above may be provided.
  • a first relay terminal performing the method for performing the multi-hop based relay described above may be provided.
  • a processing device may be provided for controlling a first relay terminal performing the multi-hop based relay described above.
  • relay communication can be performed more accurately and efficiently in a wireless communication system.
  • Figure 1 is a diagram for explaining and comparing V2X communication based on RAT before NR and V2X communication based on NR.
  • Figure 2 shows the structure of the LTE system.
  • Figure 3 shows the structure of the NR system.
  • Figure 4 shows the structure of a radio frame of NR.
  • Figure 5 shows the slot structure of an NR frame.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a communication structure that can be provided in a 6G system according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an electromagnetic spectrum according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 8 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication.
  • Figure 9 shows a terminal performing V2X or SL communication.
  • Figure 10 shows resource units for V2X or SL communication.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates an example of a BWP according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a procedure for a terminal to perform V2X or SL communication according to a resource allocation mode according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 13 is a diagram for explaining the control plane procedure of L2 U2N relay (UE-to-Network Relay).
  • Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the control plane procedure of L2 U2U relay (UE-to-UE Relay).
  • FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are diagrams for explaining a procedure for U2U relay selection (UE-to-UE Relay Selection) without relay discovery.
  • Figure 17 schematically illustrates a flat protocol stack for L2 U2U relay.
  • Figure 18 is a diagram for explaining how a first relay terminal performs multi-hop based relay.
  • Figure 19 illustrates a communication system applied to the present invention.
  • Figure 20 illustrates a wireless device that can be applied to the present invention.
  • Fig. 21 shows another example of a wireless device applied to the present invention.
  • the wireless device can be implemented in various forms depending on the use-example/service.
  • Figure 22 illustrates a vehicle or autonomous vehicle to which the present invention is applied.
  • a wireless communication system is a multiple access system that supports communication with multiple users by sharing available system resources (e.g., bandwidth, transmission power, etc.).
  • multiple access systems include a CDMA (code division multiple access) system, an FDMA (frequency division multiple access) system, a TDMA (time division multiple access) system, an OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access) system, an SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access) system, and an MC-FDMA (multi carrier frequency division multiple access) system.
  • Sidelink refers to a communication method that establishes a direct link between user equipment (UE) to directly exchange voice or data between terminals without going through a base station (BS).
  • UE user equipment
  • BS base station
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything refers to a communication technology that exchanges information with other vehicles, pedestrians, and objects with built-in infrastructure through wired/wireless communication.
  • V2X can be divided into four types: V2V (vehicle-to-vehicle), V2I (vehicle-to-infrastructure), V2N (vehicle-to-network), and V2P (vehicle-to-pedestrian).
  • V2X communication can be provided through the PC5 interface and/or the Uu interface.
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • FDMA frequency division multiple access
  • TDMA time division multiple access
  • OFDMA orthogonal frequency division multiple access
  • SC-FDMA single carrier frequency division multiple access
  • CDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as UTRA (universal terrestrial radio access) or CDMA2000.
  • TDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as GSM (global system for mobile communications)/GPRS (general packet radio service)/EDGE (enhanced data rates for GSM evolution).
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • EDGE enhanced data rates for GSM evolution
  • OFDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as IEEE (institute of electrical and electronics engineers) 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, E-UTRA (evolved UTRA).
  • IEEE 802.16m is an evolution of IEEE 802.16e, providing backward compatibility with systems based on IEEE 802.16e.
  • UTRA is part of UMTS (universal mobile telecommunications system).
  • 3GPP (3rd generation partnership project) LTE (long term evolution) is a part of E-UMTS (evolved UMTS) that uses E-UTRA (evolved-UMTS terrestrial radio access), employing OFDMA in the downlink and SC-FDMA in the uplink.
  • LTE-A (advanced) is an evolution of 3GPP LTE.
  • 5G NR is a new clean-slate type mobile communication system that is the successor technology to LTE-A and has the characteristics of high performance, low latency, and high availability. 5G NR can utilize all available spectrum resources, from low frequency bands below 1 GHz to intermediate frequency bands between 1 GHz and 10 GHz, and high frequency (millimeter wave) bands above 24 GHz.
  • FIG. 2 shows the structure of an applicable LTE system. This may be called an Evolved-UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN), or a Long Term Evolution (LTE)/LTE-A system.
  • E-UTRAN Evolved-UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-A Long Term Evolution
  • the E-UTRAN includes a base station (20; BS) that provides a control plane and a user plane to a terminal (10).
  • the terminal (10) may be fixed or mobile, and may be called by other terms such as a mobile station (MS), a user terminal (UT), a subscriber station (SS), a mobile terminal (MT), a wireless device, etc.
  • the base station (20) refers to a fixed station that communicates with the terminal (10), and may be called by other terms such as an evolved-NodeB (eNB), a base transceiver system (BTS), an access point, etc.
  • eNB evolved-NodeB
  • BTS base transceiver system
  • access point etc.
  • Base stations (20) can be connected to each other through the X2 interface.
  • the base station (20) is connected to an EPC (Evolved Packet Core, 30) through the S1 interface, more specifically, to an MME (Mobility Management Entity) through the S1-MME and to an S-GW (Serving Gateway) through the S1-U.
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core, 30
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • S-GW Serving Gateway
  • EPC (30) consists of MME, S-GW, and P-GW (Packet Data Network-Gateway).
  • MME has terminal connection information or terminal capability information, and this information is mainly used for terminal mobility management.
  • S-GW is a gateway with E-UTRAN as an end point
  • P-GW is a gateway with PDN as an end point.
  • the layers of the Radio Interface Protocol between the terminal and the network can be divided into L1 (the first layer), L2 (the second layer), and L3 (the third layer) based on the three lower layers of the Open System Interconnection (OSI) standard model, which is widely known in communication systems.
  • OSI Open System Interconnection
  • the physical layer belonging to the first layer provides an information transfer service using a physical channel
  • the RRC (Radio Resource Control) layer located in the third layer controls radio resources between the terminal and the network.
  • the RRC layer exchanges RRC messages between the terminal and the base station.
  • Figure 3 shows the structure of the NR system.
  • the NG-RAN may include a gNB and/or an eNB that provides user plane and control plane protocol termination to the UE.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a case where only a gNB is included.
  • the gNB and the eNB are connected to each other via an Xn interface.
  • the gNB and the eNB are connected to a 5th generation core network (5G Core Network: 5GC) via an NG interface. More specifically, they are connected to an access and mobility management function (AMF) via an NG-C interface, and to a user plane function (UPF) via an NG-U interface.
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • UPF user plane function
  • Figure 4 shows the structure of a radio frame of NR.
  • a radio frame can be used in uplink and downlink transmission in NR.
  • a radio frame has a length of 10 ms and can be defined as two 5 ms half-frames (Half-Frames, HF).
  • a half-frame can include five 1 ms subframes (Subframes, SF).
  • a subframe can be divided into one or more slots, and the number of slots in a subframe can be determined according to the subcarrier spacing (SCS).
  • SCS subcarrier spacing
  • Each slot can include 12 or 14 OFDM (A) symbols according to the cyclic prefix (CP).
  • each slot can include 14 symbols.
  • each slot can include 12 symbols.
  • the symbols can include OFDM symbols (or CP-OFDM symbols), SC-FDMA (Single Carrier - FDMA) symbols (or DFT-s-OFDM (Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM) symbols).
  • Table 1 illustrates the number of symbols per slot ((N slot symb ), the number of slots per frame ((N frame,u slot )) and the number of slots per subframe ((N subframe,u slot ) ) depending on the SCS setting (u) when normal CP is used.
  • Table 2 illustrates the number of symbols per slot, the number of slots per frame, and the number of slots per subframe according to SCS when extended CP is used.
  • OFDM(A) numerology e.g., SCS, CP length, etc.
  • OFDM(A) numerology e.g., SCS, CP length, etc.
  • the (absolute time) section of a time resource e.g., subframe, slot, or TTI
  • TU Time Unit
  • multiple numerologies or SCS can be supported to support various 5G services. For example, when the SCS is 15 kHz, wide area in traditional cellular bands can be supported, and when the SCS is 30 kHz/60 kHz, dense-urban, lower latency and wider carrier bandwidth can be supported. When the SCS is 60 kHz or higher, a bandwidth greater than 24.25 GHz can be supported to overcome phase noise.
  • the NR frequency band can be defined by two types of frequency ranges.
  • the two types of frequency ranges can be FR1 and FR2.
  • the numerical value of the frequency range can be changed, and for example, the two types of frequency ranges can be as shown in Table 3 below.
  • FR1 can mean "sub 6GHz range”
  • FR2 can mean “above 6GHz range” and can be called millimeter wave (mmW).
  • mmW millimeter wave
  • FR1 can include a band of 410 MHz to 7125 MHz as shown in Table 4 below. That is, FR1 can include a frequency band of 6 GHz (or 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz, etc.) or higher.
  • the frequency band of 6 GHz (or 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz, etc.) or higher included in FR1 can include an unlicensed band.
  • the unlicensed band can be used for various purposes, for example, it can be used for communication for vehicles (e.g., autonomous driving).
  • Figure 5 shows the slot structure of an NR frame.
  • a slot includes multiple symbols in the time domain.
  • one slot may include 14 symbols, but in the case of an extended CP, one slot may include 12 symbols.
  • one slot may include 7 symbols, but in the case of an extended CP, one slot may include 6 symbols.
  • a carrier includes a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency domain.
  • An RB Resource Block
  • An RB Resource Block
  • a BWP Bandwidth Part
  • P Physical Resource Block
  • a carrier can include at most N (for example, 5) BWPs.
  • Data communication can be performed through activated BWPs.
  • Each element can be referred to as a Resource Element (RE) in the resource grid, and one complex symbol can be mapped.
  • RE Resource Element
  • the wireless interface between terminals or between terminals and a network may be composed of an L1 layer, an L2 layer, and an L3 layer.
  • the L1 layer may mean a physical layer.
  • the L2 layer may mean at least one of a MAC layer, an RLC layer, a PDCP layer, and an SDAP layer.
  • the L3 layer may mean an RRC layer.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a communication structure that can be provided in a 6G system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment of FIG. 6 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • New network characteristics in 6G could include:
  • AI can be applied at each stage of the communication process (or at each stage of signal processing, as described below).
  • High-precision localization (or location-based services) through communications is one of the functions of 6G wireless communication systems. Therefore, radar systems will be integrated with 6G networks.
  • AI Artificial Intelligence: Introducing AI into communications can simplify and improve real-time data transmission. AI can use a lot of analytics to determine how complex target tasks are performed. In other words, AI can increase efficiency and reduce processing delays. Time-consuming tasks such as handover, network selection, and resource scheduling can be performed instantly using AI. AI can also play a significant role in M2M, machine-to-human, and human-to-machine communications. AI can also be a rapid communication in Brain Computer Interface (BCI). AI-based communication systems can be supported by metamaterials, intelligent structures, intelligent networks, intelligent devices, intelligent cognitive radios, self-sustaining wireless networks, and machine learning.
  • BCI Brain Computer Interface
  • THz waves also known as sub-millimeter waves, generally refer to the frequency band between 0.1 THz and 10 THz with corresponding wavelengths ranging from 0.03 mm to 3 mm.
  • the 100 GHz–300 GHz band range (Sub THz band) is considered to be the main part of the THz band for cellular communications. Adding the Sub THz band to the mmWave band will increase the capacity of 6G cellular communications.
  • 300 GHz–3 THz is in the far infrared (IR) frequency band.
  • the 300 GHz–3 THz band is part of the optical band but is at the boundary of the optical band, just behind the RF band. Therefore, this 300 GHz–3 THz band shows similarities with RF.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an electromagnetic spectrum according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment of FIG. 7 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • Key characteristics of THz communications include (i) widely available bandwidth to support very high data rates, and (ii) high path loss at high frequencies (highly directional antennas are indispensable).
  • the narrow beam width generated by the highly directional antenna reduces interference.
  • the small wavelength of THz signals allows a much larger number of antenna elements to be integrated into devices and BSs operating in this band. This enables the use of advanced adaptive array techniques to overcome range limitations.
  • FSO backhaul network Free space optical transmission backhaul network
  • UAVs or drones will be a crucial element in 6G wireless communications.
  • high-speed data wireless connectivity can be provided using UAV technology.
  • the base station (BS) entity can be installed on the UAV to provide cellular connectivity.
  • UAVs may have certain features not found in fixed BS infrastructure such as easy deployment, robust line-of-sight links, and freedom of movement with controlled mobility.
  • BS base station
  • UAVs may have certain features not found in fixed BS infrastructure such as easy deployment, robust line-of-sight links, and freedom of movement with controlled mobility.
  • UAVs can easily handle such situations.
  • UAVs will be a new paradigm in wireless communications. This technology facilitates three basic requirements of wireless networks namely eMBB, URLLC, and mMTC.
  • UAVs can also support several purposes such as enhancing network connectivity, fire detection, disaster emergency services, security and surveillance, pollution monitoring, parking monitoring, and
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • V2I vehicle to infrastructure
  • Fig. 8 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication. Specifically, Fig. 8 (a) shows a user plane protocol stack of NR, and Fig. 8 (b) shows a control plane protocol stack of NR.
  • SL synchronization signal Sidelink Synchronization Signal, SLSS
  • SLSS Segment Synchronization Signal
  • SLSS is an SL-specific sequence and may include a Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal (PSSS) and a Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal (SSSS).
  • PSSS Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal
  • SSSS Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal
  • the PSSS may be referred to as a Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal (S-PSS)
  • S-SSS Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal
  • S-SSS Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal
  • length-127 M-sequences may be used for the S-PSS
  • length-127 Gold sequences may be used for the S-SSS.
  • a terminal may detect an initial signal (signal detection) and acquire synchronization using the S-PSS.
  • the terminal may acquire detailed synchronization and detect a synchronization signal ID using the S-PSS and the S-SSS.
  • PSBCH Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel
  • PSBCH Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel
  • the basic information may be information related to SLSS, duplex mode (DM), TDD UL/DL (Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) configuration, resource pool related information, type of application related to SLSS, subframe offset, broadcast information, etc.
  • the payload size of PSBCH may be 56 bits including a 24-bit CRC.
  • S-PSS, S-SSS and PSBCH may be included in a block format supporting periodic transmission (e.g., SL SS (Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH block, hereinafter referred to as S-SSB (Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block)).
  • the S-SSB may have the same numerology (i.e., SCS and CP length) as the PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) in a carrier, and a transmission bandwidth may be within a (pre-)configured SL BWP (Sidelink BWP).
  • the bandwidth of the S-SSB may be 11 RB (Resource Block).
  • the PSBCH may span 11 RBs.
  • the frequency location of the S-SSB may be (pre-)configured. Therefore, the terminal does not need to perform hypothesis detection in frequency to discover the S-SSB in the carrier.
  • the transmitting terminal may transmit one or more S-SSBs to a receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period according to the SCS.
  • the number of S-SSBs that the transmitting terminal transmits to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period may be pre-configured or configured for the transmitting terminal.
  • the S-SSB transmission period may be 160 ms.
  • an S-SSB transmission period of 160 ms may be supported for all SCSs.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit one or two S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit one or two S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit one, two, or four S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.
  • the structure of the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal to the receiving terminal may be different depending on the CP type.
  • the CP type may be Normal CP (NCP) or Extended CP (ECP).
  • NCP Normal CP
  • ECP Extended CP
  • the number of symbols to which the PSBCH is mapped in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal may be 9 or 8.
  • the number of symbols to which the PSBCH is mapped in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal may be 7 or 6.
  • the PSBCH may be mapped to the first symbol in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal.
  • the receiving terminal receiving the S-SSB may perform an AGC (Automatic Gain Control) operation in the first symbol section of the S-SSB.
  • AGC Automatic Gain Control
  • Figure 9 shows a terminal performing V2X or SL communication.
  • terminal in V2X or SL communication may mainly mean a user's terminal.
  • a network device such as a base station transmits and receives a signal according to a communication method between terminals
  • the base station may also be considered a type of terminal.
  • terminal 1 may be a first device (100)
  • terminal 2 may be a second device (200).
  • terminal 1 can select a resource unit corresponding to a specific resource within a resource pool, which means a set of a series of resources. Then, terminal 1 can transmit an SL signal using the resource unit.
  • terminal 2 which is a receiving terminal, can be configured with a resource pool in which terminal 1 can transmit a signal, and can detect a signal of terminal 1 within the resource pool.
  • terminal 1 if terminal 1 is within the connection range of the base station, the base station can inform terminal 1 of the resource pool. On the other hand, if terminal 1 is outside the connection range of the base station, another terminal can inform terminal 1 of the resource pool, or terminal 1 can use a pre-configured resource pool.
  • a resource pool can be composed of multiple resource units, and each terminal can select one or multiple resource units to use for its SL signal transmission.
  • Figure 10 shows resource units for V2X or SL communication.
  • the entire frequency resources of the resource pool can be divided into NF units, and the entire time resources of the resource pool can be divided into NT units. Accordingly, a total of NF * NT resource units can be defined within the resource pool.
  • Fig. 13 shows an example in which the resource pool repeats with a period of NT subframes.
  • one resource unit (e.g., Unit #0) may appear repeatedly periodically. Or, in order to obtain a diversity effect in the time or frequency dimension, the index of the physical resource unit to which one logical resource unit is mapped may change in a pre-determined pattern over time.
  • a resource pool may mean a set of resource units that a terminal that wishes to transmit an SL signal can use for transmission.
  • Resource pools can be subdivided into several types. For example, depending on the content of the SL signal transmitted from each resource pool, resource pools can be divided as follows.
  • SA Scheduling Assignment
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • MIMO Multiple Input Multiple Output
  • TA Timing Advance
  • SA may also be transmitted multiplexed with SL data on the same resource unit, and in this case, the SA resource pool may mean a resource pool in which SA is multiplexed with SL data and transmitted. SA may also be called an SL control channel.
  • SL data channel Physical Sidelink Shared Channel, PSSCH
  • PSSCH Physical Sidelink Shared Channel
  • SL data channel may be a resource pool used by a transmitting terminal to transmit user data. If SA is multiplexed and transmitted together with SL data on the same resource unit, only SL data channels excluding SA information may be transmitted in the resource pool for the SL data channel. In other words, REs (Resource Elements) used to transmit SA information on individual resource units within the SA resource pool may still be used to transmit SL data in the resource pool of the SL data channel.
  • a transmitting terminal may transmit PSSCH by mapping it to consecutive PRBs.
  • the discovery channel may be a resource pool for transmitting terminals to transmit information such as their IDs. Through this, the transmitting terminals can enable adjacent terminals to discover themselves.
  • different resource pools may be used depending on the transmission/reception properties of the SL signal. For example, even when it is the same SL data channel or discovery message, it may be again divided into different resource pools depending on the transmission timing determination method of the SL signal (for example, whether it is transmitted at the time of reception of a synchronization reference signal or whether it is transmitted by applying a certain timing advance at the time of reception), the resource allocation method (for example, whether the base station designates transmission resources of individual signals to individual transmitting terminals or whether individual transmitting terminals select individual signal transmission resources on their own within the resource pool), the signal format (for example, the number of symbols that each SL signal occupies in one subframe or the number of subframes used for transmission of one SL signal), the signal strength from the base station, the transmission power strength of the SL terminal, etc.
  • the transmission timing determination method of the SL signal for example, whether it is transmitted at the time of reception of a synchronization reference signal or whether it is transmitted by applying a certain timing advance at the time of reception
  • FIG. 11 illustrates an example of a BWP according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment of FIG. 11 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure. In the embodiment of FIG. 11, it is assumed that there are three BWPs.
  • a common resource block may be a carrier resource block numbered from one end of a carrier band to the other end.
  • a PRB may be a numbered resource block within each BWP.
  • Point A may indicate a common reference point for a resource block grid.
  • the BWP can be set by a point A, an offset from point A (NstartBWP) and a bandwidth (NsizeBWP).
  • point A can be an outer reference point of PRBs of a carrier where subcarrier 0 of all nucleos (e.g., all nucleosides supported by the network on that carrier) is aligned.
  • the offset can be the PRB spacing between the lowest subcarrier in a given nucleometry and point A.
  • the bandwidth can be the number of PRBs in a given nucleometry.
  • SLSS Sidelink Synchronization Signal
  • S-PSS Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal
  • S-SSS Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal
  • length-127 M-sequences may be used for S-PSS
  • length-127 Gold sequences may be used for S-SSS.
  • a terminal may detect an initial signal (signal detection) and obtain synchronization using S-PSS.
  • the terminal can obtain detailed synchronization using S-PSS and S-SSS and detect a synchronization signal ID.
  • PSBCH Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel
  • PSBCH Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel
  • the basic information may be information related to SLSS, duplex mode (DM), TDD UL/DL (Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) configuration, resource pool related information, type of application related to SLSS, subframe offset, broadcast information, etc.
  • the payload size of PSBCH may be 56 bits including a 24-bit CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check).
  • S-PSS, S-SSS and PSBCH may be included in a block format supporting periodic transmission (e.g., SL SS (Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH block, hereinafter referred to as S-SSB (Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block)).
  • the S-SSB may have the same numerology (i.e., SCS and CP length) as the PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) in a carrier, and a transmission bandwidth may be within a (pre-)configured SL BWP (Sidelink BWP).
  • the bandwidth of the S-SSB may be 11 RB (Resource Block).
  • the PSBCH may span 11 RBs.
  • the frequency location of the S-SSB may be (pre-)configured. Therefore, the terminal does not need to perform hypothesis detection in frequency to discover the S-SSB in the carrier.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a procedure for a terminal to perform V2X or SL communication according to a resource allocation mode according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment of FIG. 12 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the base station can schedule SL resources to be used by the terminal for SL transmission.
  • the base station can transmit information related to SL resources and/or information related to UL resources to the first terminal.
  • the UL resources can include PUCCH resources and/or PUSCH resources.
  • the UL resources can be resources for reporting SL HARQ feedback to the base station.
  • the first terminal may receive information related to a DG (dynamic grant) resource and/or information related to a CG (configured grant) resource from the base station.
  • the CG resource may include a CG type 1 resource or a CG type 2 resource.
  • the DG resource may be a resource that the base station configures/allocates to the first terminal via DCI (downlink control information).
  • the CG resource may be a (periodic) resource that the base station configures/allocates to the first terminal via DCI and/or an RRC message.
  • the base station may transmit an RRC message including information related to the CG resource to the first terminal.
  • the base station may transmit an RRC message including information related to the CG resource to the first terminal, and the base station may transmit DCI related to activation or release of the CG resource to the first terminal.
  • the first terminal may transmit a PSCCH (e.g., Sidelink Control Information (SCI) or 1st-stage SCI) to the second terminal based on the resource scheduling.
  • a PSCCH e.g., Sidelink Control Information (SCI) or 1st-stage SCI
  • the first terminal may transmit a PSSCH (e.g., 2nd-stage SCI, MAC PDU, data, etc.) related to the PSCCH to the second terminal.
  • the first terminal may receive a PSFCH related to the PSCCH/PSSCH from the second terminal.
  • HARQ feedback information e.g., NACK information or ACK information
  • the first terminal may transmit/report HARQ feedback information to the base station via a PUCCH or a PUSCH.
  • the HARQ feedback information reported to the base station may be information generated by the first terminal based on the HARQ feedback information received from the second terminal.
  • the HARQ feedback information reported to the base station may be information generated by the first terminal based on a rule set in advance.
  • the DCI may be DCI for scheduling of SL.
  • a terminal in resource allocation mode 2, can determine an SL transmission resource within an SL resource set by a base station/network or a preset SL resource.
  • the set SL resource or the preset SL resource may be a resource pool.
  • the terminal can autonomously select or schedule resources for SL transmission.
  • the terminal can perform SL communication by selecting a resource by itself within the set resource pool.
  • the terminal can select a resource by itself within a selection window by performing sensing and resource (re)selection procedures.
  • the sensing can be performed on a subchannel basis.
  • a first terminal that has selected a resource by itself within a resource pool can transmit a PSCCH (e.g., SCI (Sidelink Control Information) or 1st-stage SCI) to a second terminal using the resource.
  • a PSCCH e.g., SCI (Sidelink Control Information) or 1st-stage SCI
  • the first terminal can transmit a PSSCH (e.g., 2nd-stage SCI, MAC PDU, data, etc.) related to the PSCCH to the second terminal.
  • the first terminal can receive a PSFCH related to the PSCCH/PSSCH from the second terminal.
  • the first terminal may transmit an SCI to the second terminal on the PSCCH.
  • the first terminal may transmit two consecutive SCIs (e.g., 2-stage SCIs) to the second terminal on the PSCCH and/or the PSSCH.
  • the second terminal may decode the two consecutive SCIs (e.g., 2-stage SCIs) to receive the PSSCH from the first terminal.
  • the SCI transmitted on the PSCCH may be referred to as a 1st SCI, a 1st SCI, a 1st-stage SCI, or a 1st-stage SCI format
  • the SCI transmitted on the PSSCH may be referred to as a 2nd SCI, a 2nd SCI, a 2nd-stage SCI, or a 2nd-stage SCI format.
  • the first terminal can receive the PSFCH.
  • the first terminal and the second terminal can determine the PSFCH resource, and the second terminal can transmit the HARQ feedback to the first terminal using the PSFCH resource.
  • the first terminal may transmit SL HARQ feedback to the base station through PUCCH and/or PUSCH.
  • PSCCH may be defined as a physical control channel for terminal-to-terminal direct communication
  • PSSCH may be defined as a physical data channel or physical shared channel for terminal-to-terminal direct communication
  • PSFCH may be defined as a physical feedback transmission channel for terminal-to-terminal direct communication
  • Figure 13 is a diagram for explaining the control plane procedure of L2 U2N relay (UE-to-Network Relay).
  • the PC5-RRC aspect PC5 unicast link establishment procedure of Rel-16 NR V2X can be reused to establish a secure unicast link for layer 2 UE-to-Network relaying (L2 U2N relay) between the remote UE and the relay UE before the remote UE establishes a Uu RRC connection with the network via the relay UE.
  • L2 U2N relay layer 2 UE-to-Network relaying
  • the PC5 L2 configuration for transmission between the remote UE and the U2N relay UE can be based on the RLC/MAC configuration defined in the standard.
  • the establishment of Uu SRB1/SRB2 and DRB of the remote UE follows the legacy Uu configuration procedure for L2 U2N relay.
  • a given scenario (TS 38.300) describes the control plane procedures for L2 U2N relays as shown in Table 5 below.
  • the L2 U2N Remote UE needs to establish its own PDU sessions/DRBs with the network before user plane data transmission.
  • the NR sidelink PC5 unicast link establishment procedures can be used to setup a secure unicast link between L2 U2N Remote UE and L2 U2N Relay UE before L2 U2N Remote UE establishes a Uu RRC connection with the network via L2 U2N Relay UE.
  • the establishment of Uu SRB1/SRB2 and DRB of the L2 U2N Remote UE is subject to Uu configuration procedures for L2 UE-to-Network Relay.
  • the following high level connection establishment procedure in Figure 13 applies to a L2 U2N Relay and L2 U2N Remote UE: -S1300, S1301: The L2 U2N Remote and L2 U2N Relay UE perform discovery procedure, and establish a PC5-RRC connection using the NR sidelink PC5 unicast link establishment procedure.
  • RRC message ie, RRCSetupRequest
  • the L2 U2N Relay UE sends the SidelinkUEInformationNR message to request for the dedicated configurations required to support the relay operation for the L2 U2N Remote UE. If the L2 U2N Relay UE is not in RRC_CONNECTED, it needs to do its own Uu RRC connection establishment upon reception of a message on the specified PC5 Relay RLC channel. After L2 U2N Relay UE's RRC connection establishment procedure and sending the SidelinkUEInformationNR message, gNB configures SRB0 relaying Uu Relay RLC channel to the U2N Relay UE. The gNB responds with an RRCSetup message to L2 U2N Remote UE.
  • the RRCSetup message is sent to the L2 U2N Remote UE using SRB0 relaying Uu Relay RLC channel over Uu and a specified PC5 Relay RLC channel over PC5.
  • -S1304 The gNB and L2 U2N Relay UE perform relaying channel setup procedure over Uu. According to the configuration from gNB, the L2 U2N Relay/Remote UE establishes a PC5 Relay RLC channel for relaying of SRB1 towards the L2 U2N Remote/Relay UE over PC5.
  • -S1305 The RRCSetupComplete message is sent by the L2 U2N Remote UE to the gNB via the L2 U2N Relay UE using SRB1 relaying channel over PC5 and SRB1 relaying channel configured to the L2 U2N Relay UE over Uu. Then the L2 U2N Remote UE is as in RRC_CONNECTED with the gNB.
  • S1307 The L2 U2N Remote UE and gNB establish security following the Uu security mode procedure and the security messages are forwarded through the L2 U2N Relay UE.
  • the gNB sends an RRCReconfiguration message to the L2 U2N Remote UE via the L2 U2N Relay UE, to setup the end-to-end SRB2/DRBs of the L2 U2N Remote UE.
  • the L2 U2N Remote UE sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the gNB via the L2 U2N Relay UE as a response.
  • the gNB may configure additional Uu Relay RLC channels between the gNB and L2 U2N Relay UE, and PC5 Relay RLC channels between L2 U2N Relay UE and L2 U2N Remote UE for the relaying traffic
  • RRC reconfiguration and RRC disconnection procedures can reuse legacy RRC procedures with message content/configuration design left in the WI phase.
  • RRC connection re-establishment and RRC connection resumption procedures can reuse existing RRC procedures as a baseline by considering the connection establishment procedure of the above L2 U2N relay to handle relay-specific parts along with message content/composition design. Message content/composition can be defined later.
  • Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the control plane procedure of L2 U2U relay (UE-to-UE Relay).
  • L2 U2U relay UE-to-UE Relay
  • Table 6 The control plane procedure of L2 U2U relay
  • the L2 U2U Remote UE, L2 U2U Relay UE, and peer L2 U2U Remote UE perform discovery procedure or integrated discovery procedure.
  • the L2 U2U Remote UE establishes/modifies a PC5-RRC connection with the selected L2 U2U Relay UE (ie, as specified in TS 23.304 [48]).
  • the L2 U2U Relay UE establishes/modifies a PC5-RRC connection with the peer L2 U2U Remote UE (ie, as specified in TS 23.304 [48]). 3.
  • the L2 U2U Relay UE allocates two local IDs and the two local IDs are delivered via RRCReconfigurationSidelink message to each of the L2 U2U Remote UEs: one local ID to identify the L2 U2U Remote UE, the other local ID to identify the peer L2 U2U Remote UE.
  • an L2 ID of the peer L2 U2U Remote UE is also delivered to the U2U Remote UE for making the association between the local ID and the L2 ID of the peer U2U Remote UE.
  • the L2 U2U Remote UE establishes end-to-end PC5-RRC connection with the peer L2 U2U Remote UE via the L2 U2U Relay UE.
  • the L2 U2U Relay UE sends the split QoS value (ie, PDB) via PC5-RRC message to the L2 U2U Remote UE.
  • the L2 U2U Remote UE or the serving gNB of the L2 U2U Remote UE derives the PDCP and SDAP configuration for end-to-end SL-DRB.
  • the L2 U2U Remote UE provides the portion of the configuration related to reception to the peer L2 U2U Remote UE using end-to-end RRCReconfigurationSidelink messages.
  • the end-to-end bearer IDs for SL-SRB and SL-DRB are used as input for the L2 U2U Relay ciphering and integrity protection at SL PDCP. 9a.
  • the L2 U2U Remote UE or the serving gNB of the L2 U2U Remote UE derives the first hop configuration (eg PC5 Relay RLC Channel configuration) for SL-DRB,
  • the L2 U2U Remote UE provides the L2 U2U Relay UE with the configuration related to receiving on the first hop (ie, Rx by the relay UE), using per-hop RRCReconfigurationSidelink message.
  • the L2 U2U Relay UE or the serving gNB of the L2 U2U Relay UE derives the second hop configuration (eg PC5 Relay RLC Channel configuration) for each SL-DRB.
  • the Relay UE provides the peer L2 U2U Remote UE with the configuration related to receiving on the second hop (ie, RX by the peer remote UE), using per-hop RRCReconfigurationSidelink message. 10.
  • the L2 U2U Remote UE and the peer L2 U2U Remote UE transmit or receive data via L2 U2U Relay UE
  • the PC5 connection or direct connection between the U2U remote UE and the U2U relay UE can be defined as a 1st-hop connection
  • the PC5 connection or direct connection between the U2U relay UE and the peer U2U remote UE (or target remote UE) can be defined as a 2nd-hop connection.
  • FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are diagrams for explaining a procedure for U2U relay selection (UE-to-UE Relay Selection) without relay discovery.
  • the source UE may first try to find the target UE by transmitting a Direct Communication Request or Solicitation message containing target UE information. If the source UE cannot reach the target UE directly, it will try to discover a UE-to-UE relay to reach the target UE which may also trigger the relay to discover the target UE.
  • the source UE may integrate the discovery of the target UE and/or the discovery/selection of a U2U relay based on the following two alternatives:
  • U2U relay discovery/selection can be integrated into the unicast link setup procedure (see clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287).
  • a new field may be added to the Direct Communication Request or Solicitation message to indicate whether a relay is available for communication.
  • the new field may be defined as Relay_indication.
  • the request message may include Relay_indication for whether a U2U relay is available. Meanwhile, for Release 17, it may be assumed that the value of Relay_indication is restricted to a single hop.
  • the U2U relay can decide whether to forward the request message (i.e., modify the message and broadcast it nearby). For example, the U2U relay can decide whether to forward the request message by considering the Application ID, authorization policy (e.g., Relay for a specific ProSe service), current traffic load of the Relay, radio status between the Source UE and the Relay UE, etc. if there is a Relay Service Code.
  • the Application ID e.g., Relay for a specific ProSe service
  • current traffic load of the Relay e.g., Relay for a specific ProSe service
  • radio status between the Source UE and the Relay UE e.g., radio status between the Source UE and the Relay UE, etc. if there is a Relay Service Code.
  • multiple U2U relays may be used to reach the target UE (case 1), or the target UE may directly receive the request message from the source UE (case 2).
  • the target UE may choose whether to respond to either the first or the second case.
  • the target UE may choose whether to respond to either the first or the second case based on signal strength, local policy (e.g., traffic load of the UE-UE relay), relay service code (if there is a relay service code), and/or operator policy (e.g., always preferring direct communication or using only some specific UE-UE relays).
  • the source UE may receive responses to the request message from multiple U2U relays, or may receive responses to the request message directly from the target UE.
  • the source UE may select a communication path (direct path or indirect path) based on signal strength or operator policy (e.g., always preferring direct communication or using only some specific UE-UE relays).
  • UE-to-UE relay discovery and selection is integrated into the unicast link establishment procedure (Alternative 1)
  • Fig 14 illustrates the procedure of the proposed method. 0.
  • UEs are authorized to use the service provided by the UE-to-UE relays.
  • UE-to-UE relays are authorized to provide service of relaying traffic among UEs.
  • the authorization and the parameter provisioning can use solutions for KI#8, eg Sol#36.
  • the authorization can be done when UEs/relays are registered to the network.
  • Security related parameters may be provisioned so that a UE and a relay can verify the authorization with each other if needed. 1.
  • UE-1 wants to establish unicast communication with UE-2 and the communication can be either through direct link with UE-2 or via a UE-to-UE relay. Then UE-1 broadcasts Direct Communication Request with relay_indication enabled. The message will be received by relay-1, relay-2. The message may also be received by UE-2 if it is in the proximity of UE-1.
  • UE-1 includes source UE info, target UE info, Application ID, as well as Relay Service Code if there is any. If UE-1 does not want relay to be involved in the communication, then it will made relay_indication disabled.
  • the data type of relay_indication can be determined in Stage 3. Details of Direct Communication Request/Accept messages will be determined in stage 3. 2.
  • Relay-1 and relay-2 decide to participate in the procedure.
  • a relay broadcasts the Direct Communication Request message, it includes source UE info, target UE info and Relay UE info (eg Relay UE ID) in the message and use Relay's L2 address as the source Layer-2 ID.
  • the Relay maintains association between the source UE information (eg source UE L2 ID) and the new Direct Communication Request.
  • UE-2 receives the Direct Communication Requests from relay-1 and relay-2.
  • UE-2 may also receive Direct Communication Request message directly from the UE-1 if the UE-2 is in the communication range of UE-1.
  • UE-2 chooses relay-1 and replies with Direct Communication Accept message.
  • UE-2 may choose to setup a direct communication link by sending the Direct Communication Accept message directly to UE-1.
  • a UE-to-UE relay retrieves the source UE information stored in step 2 and sends the Direct Communication Accept message to the source UE with its Relay UE info added in the message.
  • UE-1 and UE-2 have respectively setup the PC5 links with the chosen UE-to-UE relay.
  • the security establishment between the UE1 and Relay-1, and between Relay-1 and UE-2 are performed before the Relay-1 and UE-2 send Direct Communication Accept message. Details of the authentication/security establishment procedure are determined by SA WG3.
  • the security establishment procedure can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the source (or target) UE and the relay which can be used for relaying the traffic. 5.
  • UE-1 receives the Direct Communication Accept message from relay-1.
  • UE-1 chooses path according to eg policies (eg always choose direct path if it is possible), signal strength, etc.
  • UE-1 receives Direct Communication Accept / Response message request accept directly from UE-2, it may choose to setup a direct PC5 L2 link with UE-2 as described in clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287 [5], then step 6 is skipped. 6a.
  • UE-1 and UE-2 finish setting up the communication link via the chosen UE-to-UE relay.
  • the link setup information may vary depending on the type of relay, eg L2 or L3 relaying. Then UE-1 and UE-2 can communicate via the relay. Regarding IP address allocation for the source/remote UE, the addresses can be either assigned by the relay or by the UE itself (eg link-local IP address) as defined in clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287 [5]. 6b.
  • the source and target UE can setup an end-to-end PC5 link via the relay.
  • UE-1 sends a unicast E2E Direct Communication Request message to UE-2 via the Relay-1
  • UE-2 responds with a unicast E2E Direct Communication Accept message to UE-1 via the Relay-1.
  • Relay-1 transfers the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer.
  • Note 3 How Relay-1 can transfer the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer requires cooperation with RAN2 during the normative phase.
  • NOTE 4 In order to make a relay or path selection, the source UE can setup a timer after sending out the Direct Communication Request for collecting the corresponding response messages before making a decision. Similarly, the target UE can also setup a timer after receiving the first copy of the Direct Communication Request / message for collecting multiple copies of the message from different paths before making a decision.
  • UE-to-UE relay discovery and selection is integrated into Model B direct discovery procedure (Alternative 2) Depicted in Fig 15 is the procedure for UE-UE Relay discovery Model B, and the discovery/selection procedure is separated from hop by hop and end-to-end link establishment.
  • UE-1 broadcasts discovery solicitation message carrying UE-1 info, target UE info (UE-2), Application ID, Relay Service Code if any, the UE-1 can also indicate relay_indication enabled.
  • the candidate Relay UE-R broadcasts discovery solicitation carrying UE-1 info, UE-R info, Target UE info.
  • the Relay UE-R uses Relay's L2 address as the source Layer-2 ID.
  • the target UE-2 responds the discovery message.
  • UE-2 receives discovery solicitation message in step 1, then UE-2 responds discovery response in step 3b with UE-1 info, UE-2 info. If not and UE-2 receives discovery solicitation in step 2, then UE-2 responds discovery response message in step 3a with UE-1 info, UE-R info, UE-2 info. 4. On reception of discovery response in step 3a, UE-R sends discovery response with UE-1 info, UE-R info, UE-2 info. If more than one candidate Relay UEs responding discovery response message, UE-1 can select one Relay UE based on eg implementation or link qualification. 5. The source and target UE may need to setup PC5 links with the relay before communicating with each other.
  • Step 5a can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the UE-1 and UE-R which can be used for relaying.
  • Step 5b can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the UE-2 and UE-R which can be used for relaying.
  • 6a Same as step 6a described in clause 6.8.2.1. 6b.
  • the E2E unicast Direct Communication Request message is sent from UE1 to the selected Relay via the per-hop link (established in steps 5a) and the Adaptation layer info identifying the peer UE (UE3 ) as the destination.
  • the UE-to-UE Relay transfers the E2E messages based on the identity information of peer UE in the Adaptation Layer.
  • the initiator (UE1) knows the Adaptation layer info identifying the peer UE (UE3) after a discovery procedure. UE3 responds with E2E unicast Direct Communication Accept message in the same way.
  • UE1 For the Layer 2 UE-to-UE Relay case, whether step5b is performed before step 6b or triggered during step 6b will be decided at normative phase.
  • UE 2 How Relay-1 can transfer the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer requires cooperation with RAN2 during the normative phase. 6.8.3 Impacts on services, entities and interfaces UE impacts to support new Relay related functions.
  • Figure 17 schematically illustrates a flat protocol stack for L2 U2U relay.
  • Fig. 17(a) illustrates a user plane protocol stack for an L2 U2U relay
  • Fig. 17(b) illustrates a control plane protocol stack for an L2 U2U relay.
  • Table 9 below provides a description related to Fig. 17 regarding the Architecture and Protocol Stack of a Layer-2 Relay.
  • L2 UE-to-UE Relay architecture the protocol stacks are similar to L2 UE-to-Network Relay other than the fact that the termination points are two Remote UEs.
  • the protocol stacks for the user plane and control plane of L2 UE-to-UE Relay architecture are described in Figure 5.5.1-1 and Figure 5.5.1-2.
  • An adaptation layer is supported over the second PC5 link (ie the PC5 link between Relay UE and Destination UE) for L2 UE-to-UE Relay.
  • the adaptation layer is put over RLC sublayer for both CP and UP over the second PC5 link.
  • the sidelink SDAP/PDCP and RRC are terminated between two Remote UEs, while RLC, MAC and PHY are terminated in each PC5 link.
  • first hop of L2 UE-to-UE Relay - The N:1 mapping is supported by first hop PC5 adaptation layer between Remote UE SL Radio Bearers and first hop PC5 RLC channels for relaying.
  • the adaptation layer over first PC5 hop between Source Remote UE and Relay UE supports to identify traffic destined to different Destination Remote UEs.
  • the second hop PC5 adaptation layer can be used to support bearer mapping between the ingress RLC channels over first PC5 hop and egress RLC channels over second PC5 hop at Relay UE.
  • - PC5 Adaptation layer supports the N:1 bearer mapping between multiple ingress PC5 RLC channels over first PC5 hop and one egress PC5 RLC channel over second PC5 hop and supports the Remote UE identification function.
  • L2 UE-to-UE Relay - The identity information of Remote UE end-to-end Radio Bearer is included in the adaptation layer in first and second PC5 hop.
  • the identity information of Source Remote UE and/or the identity information of Destination Remote UE are candidate information to be included in the adaptation layer, which are to be decided in WI phase.
  • U2U relay and U2N relay operations may also be operated based on a multi-hop using multiple relay UEs rather than one. Therefore, the following describes in detail a method for performing U2U relay and U2N relay operations based on a multi-hop using multiple relay UEs rather than one.
  • the multi-hop relay operation described later can be applied not only to the U2U relay operation but also to the U2N relay operation.
  • the proposed method described later can be applied to the U2N relay operation by replacing the source relay UE or the target relay UE described later with a base station (or, network).
  • the U2U relay operation will be mainly described.
  • a source remote UE can select a relay UE.
  • the relay UE selected from the source remote UE can select a relay UE of the next hop.
  • the method for the relay UE to select a relay UE of the next hop can be as follows.
  • RSRP Reference Signals Received Power
  • SL sidelink
  • SD sidelink discovery
  • a candidate relay UE having the smallest number of hops that can reach the target remote UE among other candidate relay UEs to be selected.
  • the number of hops that can reach the target remote UE may be information included in a PC5-S message (e.g., discovery, discovery response, DCR/DCA, etc.), and/or a PC5-RRC message (e.g., RRCReconfigurationSidelink, RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink).
  • the candidate relay UE with the largest remaining PDB Packet Delay Budget
  • the relay UE may perform at least one of the following operations.
  • the relay UE can report the detection of the RLF to the source remote UE.
  • the relay UE can inform the source remote UE that an RLF has occurred on a hop (or hop connection) associated with it as follows.
  • the relay UE may generate a PC5-RRC message (e.g., a notification message) to report an RLF for the hop connection connected to it.
  • the generated message may have an SRC (Source or Source UE)/DST (Destination or Destination UE) address of an adaptation layer set to a value identifying the target remote UE and the source remote UE used in the existing relay operation (e.g., so that the generated message can be treated as a message that the target/source remote UE delivers to the source/target remote UE).
  • SRC Source or Source UE
  • DST Destination or Destination UE
  • the relay UE may further include information indicating the hop number of the hop/hop connection in which the RLF was detected in the message for reporting the RLF. That is, the message for reporting a multi-hop RLF may further include a value for the hop number or hop count in which the RLF occurred.
  • relay UE A When relay UE A detects an RLF for a 1-hop connection (or a 1st-hop connection) connected to itself, the relay UE A may notify information about the RLF (e.g., via an RLF notification message) only to relay UE B that has formed another hop connection (or a 2nd-hop connection). In this case, relay UE B or relay UE A may release the 2nd-hop connection and transmit an RLF notification message including RLF detection information for the 1st-hop connection to relay UE C that has formed another hop connection (or a 3rd-hop connection) connected to itself. At this time, the relay UE B may release the 3rd-hop connection with the relay UE C while transmitting the RLF notification message. If the relay UE B provides the RLF notification message to the relay UE C, the relay UE C may release the 3rd-hop connection with the relay UE B.
  • a process like this may be continued until the source remote UE is notified of an RLF for the 1st-hop connection (or, until a relay UE, with which a 1st-hop connection has been formed, releases the 1st-hop connection due to an RLF for the 1st-hop connection).
  • the RLF notification message may further include information about at which hop the RLF occurred.
  • relay UE A which detects an RLF for a hop connection, may transmit a release message to relay UE B, indicating that the cause value of the release of the hop connection is RLF, while also releasing the hop connection with relay UE B, which formed another hop connection with itself.
  • Relay UE B which receives the release message, may transmit a release message indicating that the cause value of the release of the hop connection is RLF while releasing the hop connection with another relay UE (C) connected to itself.
  • the release message may further include indication information on which hop the RLF occurred.
  • the relay UE detecting the RLF may inform the source remote UE of its ID (e.g., L2 ID (and/or) local ID) and/or the relay UE ID (e.g., L2 ID and/or local ID) that formed the hop connection (or link) where the RLF occurred.
  • ID e.g., L2 ID (and/or) local ID
  • the relay UE ID e.g., L2 ID and/or local ID
  • a source remote UE that receives an RLF notification message and/or a release message having RLF as a cause value in case 1 and/or case 2 described above may trigger relay re-selection.
  • the relay UE may transmit the RLF notification message and/or the release message having RLF as a cause value to all of the multiple other relay UEs and/or source remote UEs.
  • the above-described proposed method can be applied by replacing the source remote UE with a target remote UE or a base station, or by replacing the target remote UE with a source remote UE or a base station.
  • Relay reselection based on RLF detection and/or reporting may also be triggered directly at the relay UE (rather than at the source/target remote UE). That is, a relay UE performing multi-hop U2U relay operation may trigger relay reselection operation conditionally on detection of RLF for its established hop connection. In this case, the relay UE may perform the following relay reselection operation:
  • the relay UE may broadcast a discovery message when it detects an RLF for a hop connection as described above.
  • a source address of the discovery message may be set to an address (i.e., an L2 address, a local/temporal address) for identifying a source remote UE (e.g., a remote UE transmitting data through the hop connection) other than its own address.
  • a destination address of the discovery message may be set to an address for identifying a target remote UE.
  • the relay UE may transmit a discovery message for relay reselection by using a discovery message (pre-stored) of a source remote UE that is used for selecting another relay UE that formed the hop connection for which an RLF was detected.
  • a relay UE may report the hop connection with the new relay UE to the source remote UE.
  • the relay UE may need to report information about the reselection of the new relay UE to the source remote UE.
  • the relay UE may start/start a newly defined timer.
  • the relay UE may stop/suspend the timer when the connection to the target remote UE is restored/reestablished if a new relay UE is discovered.
  • the relay UE may report information about the detection of RLF (or information about relay reselection failure) to the source remote UE and/or other relay UEs connected to it.
  • the other relay UEs and/or the source remote UEs that receive such information may release their hop connections or trigger relay reselection.
  • the manner in which the relay UE triggers relay reselection in the multi-hop relay operation may not be applied to a relay UE that has formed a direct hop connection with the source remote UE (or the target remote UE).
  • the source remote UE (or the target remote UE) may directly perform relay reselection instead of the relay UE that has formed a direct hop connection with the source remote UE (or the target remote UE).
  • the proposed invention can quickly recover an intermediate hop connection in which an RLF has occurred by having a relay UE detect an RLF occurrence directly perform relay reselection when an RLF has occurred for the hop connection.
  • the above-described proposal can be applied not only to a multi-hop based U2U relay but also to a U2N relay. In this case, it is obvious that the above-described proposal can also be applied to the operation for a multi-hop U2N relay when the above-described source remote UE or target remote UE is replaced with a base station (gNB).
  • gNB base station
  • Figure 18 is a diagram for explaining how a first relay terminal performs multi-hop based relay.
  • the first relay terminal can form or establish a first hop connection and a second hop connection for a multi-hop based relay (S181).
  • the multi-hop based relay is a relay communication that connects a first device and a second device through at least two relays, and the first device may be a remote terminal (or a source remote terminal) or a network, and the second device may be a remote terminal (or a target remote terminal, or a network).
  • the multi-hop based relay may be a multi-hop based U2N relay for transmitting and receiving data between a remote terminal and a network, or a multi-hop based U2U relay for transmitting and receiving data between a source remote terminal and a target remote terminal.
  • the first relay terminal can form the first hop connection and the second hop connection for the multi-hop based relay through a discovery procedure.
  • the first hop connection can be a connection with the first device (PC5 connection or Uu connection) or a connection with another relay terminal (PC5 connection)
  • the second hop connection can be a connection with the second device (PC5 connection or Uu connection) or a connection with another relay terminal (PC5 connection).
  • the first relay terminal can perform configuration for each hop connection, and configuration for the connection (or end-to-end connection) between the first device and the second device through an RRC message (or PC5 RRC message) with the first device, the second device, and/or the other relay terminal.
  • the first relay terminal can monitor whether a Radio Link Failure (RLF) is detected for the first-hop connection or the second-hop connection (S183).
  • the first relay terminal can measure a signal quality (Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP) or Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRP)) for the first-hop connection and/or the second-hop connection, and determine or declare that an RLF has occurred or detected if the signal quality is below a specific threshold for a preset threshold time.
  • RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
  • RSRP Reference Signal Received Quality
  • the first relay terminal may perform a procedure for reselecting a relay terminal for one of the first hop connection and the second hop connection when an RLF for the one hop connection is detected (S185). For example, when an RLF for the second hop connection is detected, the first relay terminal may perform a relay reselection procedure for selecting a new relay terminal for the second hop connection without reporting on the RLF detection through the first hop connection. Meanwhile, when the relay communication is performed through one relay terminal, the relay terminal only reports information on the RLF detection to the source device (or, target device) and does not directly perform the relay reselection procedure.
  • the relay reselection procedure for the one-hop connection in which the RLF is detected may be performed through a discovery procedure.
  • the first relay terminal may perform a procedure for re-establishing the one-hop connection with the new relay terminal if a new relay terminal for the one-hop connection is discovered/searched through the discovery procedure within a preset time.
  • the first relay terminal may report information about the re-establishment of the one-hop connection with the new relay terminal to the first device or the second device.
  • the first relay terminal may report information about the re-establishment of the one-hop connection to the first device or the second device only when the total number of hops for the multi-hop based relay increases due to the re-establishment of the one-hop connection with the new relay terminal.
  • the first relay terminal may report RLF detection information (or information on failure of relay reselection) for the one hop connection. For example, if an RLF for the second hop connection is detected and a discovery procedure for the second hop connection is performed but a new relay terminal is not discovered, the first relay terminal may report RLF detection information for the second hop connection to the first device (and/or another relay terminal connected to the first device through the first hop connection) through the first hop connection. In this case, the RLF detection information may further include a value of a hop number for the second hop connection.
  • the RLF detection information may be reported through a release message defined to release the hop connection, and the release message may be set to a cause value of RLF detection even if an RLF is not detected for the first hop connection.
  • the other relay terminals that formed the first hop connection with the first relay UE may perform a release procedure for the first hop connection and/or the remaining hop connections while reporting the RLF detection information to the first device.
  • the preset time described above may be an operation time of a timer newly defined for a reselection procedure of the relay terminal that the relay terminal directly performs.
  • the timer may operate when an RLF for the second hop connection is detected or the relay reselection procedure is triggered, and may expire when the preset time elapses without searching for a new relay terminal.
  • the timer may be stopped/suspended when a new relay terminal is searched/discovered through the relay reselection procedure.
  • the first relay terminal may not perform a relay reselection procedure for the second hop connection.
  • the first relay terminal may report RLF detection information for the second hop connection to the first device without performing the relay reselection procedure.
  • the RLF detection information may be delivered via a release message as described above.
  • hop connections connected for the multi-hop relay may be sequentially released together with the sequential reporting/delivery of the release messages.
  • the proposed invention can quickly recover a hop connection in which an RLF is detected even in relay communication based on multiple hop connections by having the relay terminal directly perform a reselection procedure for the hop connection in which an RLF is detected.
  • the proposed invention can quickly release the remaining hop connections related to the hop connection in which an RLF is detected by sequentially reporting RLF detection information through multiple hop connections and also sequentially performing release for the hop connections.
  • Figure 19 illustrates a communication system applied to the present invention.
  • a communication system (1) applied to the present invention includes a wireless device, a base station, and a network.
  • the wireless device means a device that performs communication using a wireless access technology (e.g., 5G NR (New RAT), LTE (Long Term Evolution)) and may be referred to as a communication/wireless/5G device.
  • the wireless device may include a robot (100a), a vehicle (100b-1, 100b-2), an XR (eXtended Reality) device (100c), a hand-held device (100d), a home appliance (100e), an IoT (Internet of Thing) device (100f), and an AI device/server (400).
  • the vehicle may include a vehicle equipped with a wireless communication function, an autonomous vehicle, a vehicle capable of performing vehicle-to-vehicle communication, etc.
  • the vehicle may include a UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) (e.g., a drone).
  • XR devices include AR (Augmented Reality)/VR (Virtual Reality)/MR (Mixed Reality) devices and can be implemented in the form of HMD (Head-Mounted Device), HUD (Head-Up Display) installed in a vehicle, television, smartphone, computer, wearable device, home appliance, digital signage, vehicle, robot, etc.
  • HMD Head-Mounted Device
  • HUD Head-Up Display
  • Portable devices can include smartphone, smart pad, wearable device (e.g., smart watch, smart glass), computer (e.g., laptop, etc.).
  • Home appliances can include TV, refrigerator, washing machine, etc.
  • IoT devices can include sensors, smart meters, etc.
  • base stations and networks can also be implemented as wireless devices, and a specific wireless device (200a) can act as a base station/network node to other wireless devices.
  • Wireless devices (100a to 100f) can be connected to a network (300) via a base station (200). Artificial Intelligence (AI) technology can be applied to the wireless devices (100a to 100f), and the wireless devices (100a to 100f) can be connected to an AI server (400) via the network (300).
  • the network (300) can be configured using a 3G network, a 4G (e.g., LTE) network, a 5G (e.g., NR) network, etc.
  • the wireless devices (100a to 100f) can communicate with each other via the base station (200)/network (300), but can also communicate directly (e.g., sidelink communication) without going through the base station/network.
  • vehicles can communicate directly (e.g. V2V (Vehicle to Vehicle)/V2X (Vehicle to everything) communication).
  • IoT devices e.g., sensors
  • IoT devices can communicate directly with other IoT devices (e.g., sensors) or other wireless devices (100a to 100f).
  • Wireless communication/connection can be established between wireless devices (100a to 100f)/base stations (200), and base stations (200)/base stations (200).
  • the wireless communication/connection can be achieved through various wireless access technologies (e.g., 5G NR) such as uplink/downlink communication (150a), sidelink communication (150b) (or, D2D communication), and communication between base stations (150c) (e.g., relay, IAB (Integrated Access Backhaul).
  • 5G NR wireless access technologies
  • a wireless device and a base station/wireless device, and a base station and a base station can transmit/receive wireless signals to/from each other.
  • the wireless communication/connection can transmit/receive signals through various physical channels.
  • various configuration information setting processes for transmitting/receiving wireless signals various signal processing processes (e.g., channel encoding/decoding, modulation/demodulation, resource mapping/demapping, etc.), and resource allocation processes can be performed based on various proposals of the present invention.
  • Figure 20 illustrates a wireless device that can be applied to the present invention.
  • the first wireless device (100) and the second wireless device (200) can transmit and receive wireless signals through various wireless access technologies (e.g., LTE, NR).
  • ⁇ the first wireless device (100), the second wireless device (200) ⁇ can correspond to ⁇ the wireless device (100x), the base station (200) ⁇ and/or ⁇ the wireless device (100x), the wireless device (100x) ⁇ of FIG. 19.
  • a first wireless device (100) includes one or more processors (102) and one or more memories (104), and may additionally include one or more transceivers (106) and/or one or more antennas (108).
  • the processor (102) controls the memory (104) and/or the transceiver (106), and may be configured to implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document.
  • the processor (102) may process information in the memory (104) to generate first information/signal, and then transmit a wireless signal including the first information/signal via the transceiver (106).
  • the processor (102) may receive a wireless signal including second information/signal via the transceiver (106), and then store information obtained from signal processing of the second information/signal in the memory (104).
  • the memory (104) may be connected to the processor (102) and may store various information related to the operation of the processor (102). For example, the memory (104) may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor (102), or may store software codes including instructions for performing the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document.
  • the processor (102) and the memory (104) may be part of a communication modem/circuit/chipset designed to implement wireless communication technology (e.g., LTE, NR).
  • the transceiver (106) may be connected to the processor (102) and may transmit and/or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas (108).
  • the transceiver (106) may include a transmitter and/or a receiver.
  • the transceiver (106) may be used interchangeably with an RF (Radio Frequency) unit.
  • a wireless device may also mean a communication modem/circuit/chipset.
  • the first wireless device or terminal (100) may include a processor (102) and a memory (104) connected to a transceiver (106).
  • the memory (104) may include at least one program capable of performing operations related to the “Method for (Re)selection of Relays for Multi-Hop Relay Operation” and the embodiments described in FIG. 18.
  • the processor (102) controls the transceiver (106) to form a first hop connection and a second hop connection for the multi-hop based relay, monitors whether an RLF (Radio Link Failure) occurs for the first hop connection or the second hop connection, and triggers a reselection procedure of a relay terminal for one of the first hop connection and the second hop connection based on the occurrence of an RLF for the one hop connection.
  • RLF Radio Link Failure
  • a processing device including a processor (102) and a memory (104) may be configured.
  • at least one processor and at least one memory connected to the at least one processor and storing instructions, wherein the instructions, based on being executed by the at least one processor, cause the first relay terminal to: form a first hop connection and a second hop connection for the multi-hop based relay, monitor whether an RLF (Radio Link Failure) occurs for the first hop connection or the second hop connection, and trigger a reselection procedure of the relay terminal for the one hop connection based on the occurrence of an RLF for one of the first hop connection and the second hop connection.
  • RLF Radio Link Failure
  • the second wireless device (200) includes one or more processors (202), one or more memories (204), and may additionally include one or more transceivers (206) and/or one or more antennas (208).
  • the processor (202) may be configured to control the memories (204) and/or the transceivers (206), and implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. For example, the processor (202) may process information in the memory (204) to generate third information/signals, and then transmit a wireless signal including the third information/signals via the transceivers (206). Additionally, the processor (202) may receive a wireless signal including fourth information/signals via the transceivers (206), and then store information obtained from signal processing of the fourth information/signals in the memory (204).
  • the memory (204) may be connected to the processor (202) and may store various information related to the operation of the processor (202). For example, the memory (204) may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor (202), or may store software codes including commands for performing the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document.
  • the processor (202) and the memory (204) may be part of a communication modem/circuit/chip designed to implement wireless communication technology (e.g., LTE, NR).
  • the transceiver (206) may be connected to the processor (202) and may transmit and/or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas (208).
  • the transceiver (206) may include a transmitter and/or a receiver.
  • the transceiver (206) may be used interchangeably with an RF unit.
  • a wireless device may also mean a communication modem/circuit/chip.
  • one or more protocol layers may be implemented by one or more processors (102, 202).
  • processors (102, 202) may implement one or more layers (e.g., functional layers such as PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, SDAP).
  • processors (102, 202) may generate one or more Protocol Data Units (PDUs) and/or one or more Service Data Units (SDUs) according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document.
  • PDUs Protocol Data Units
  • SDUs Service Data Units
  • One or more processors (102, 202) may generate messages, control information, data, or information according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document.
  • One or more processors (102, 202) can generate signals (e.g., baseband signals) including PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information according to the functions, procedures, suggestions and/or methodologies disclosed herein and provide the signals to one or more transceivers (106, 206).
  • One or more processors (102, 202) can receive signals (e.g., baseband signals) from one or more transceivers (106, 206) and obtain PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed herein.
  • signals e.g., baseband signals
  • the one or more processors (102, 202) may be referred to as a controller, a microcontroller, a microprocessor, or a microcomputer.
  • the one or more processors (102, 202) may be implemented by hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof.
  • ASICs Application Specific Integrated Circuits
  • DSPs Digital Signal Processors
  • DSPDs Digital Signal Processing Devices
  • PLDs Programmable Logic Devices
  • FPGAs Field Programmable Gate Arrays
  • the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software, and the firmware or software may be implemented to include modules, procedures, functions, etc.
  • the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software configured to perform one or more of the following: included in one or more processors (102, 202), or stored in one or more memories (104, 204) and driven by one or more of the processors (102, 202).
  • the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software in the form of codes, instructions and/or sets of instructions.
  • One or more memories (104, 204) may be coupled to one or more processors (102, 202) and may store various forms of data, signals, messages, information, programs, codes, instructions and/or commands.
  • the one or more memories (104, 204) may be comprised of ROM, RAM, EPROM, flash memory, hard drives, registers, cache memory, computer readable storage media and/or combinations thereof.
  • the one or more memories (104, 204) may be located internally and/or externally to the one or more processors (102, 202). Additionally, the one or more memories (104, 204) may be coupled to the one or more processors (102, 202) via various technologies, such as wired or wireless connections.
  • One or more transceivers (106, 206) can transmit user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc., as described in the methods and/or flowcharts of this document, to one or more other devices.
  • One or more transceivers (106, 206) can receive user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc., as described in the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or flowcharts of this document, from one or more other devices.
  • one or more transceivers (106, 206) can be coupled to one or more processors (102, 202) and can transmit and receive wireless signals.
  • one or more processors (102, 202) can control one or more transceivers (106, 206) to transmit user data, control information, or wireless signals to one or more other devices. Additionally, one or more processors (102, 202) may control one or more transceivers (106, 206) to receive user data, control information, or wireless signals from one or more other devices. Additionally, one or more transceivers (106, 206) may be coupled to one or more antennas (108, 208), and one or more transceivers (106, 206) may be configured to transmit and receive user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, and the like, as described in the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed herein, via one or more antennas (108, 208).
  • one or more antennas may be multiple physical antennas, or multiple logical antennas (e.g., antenna ports).
  • One or more transceivers (106, 206) may convert received user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. from RF band signals to baseband signals in order to process the received user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. using one or more processors (102, 202).
  • One or more transceivers (106, 206) may convert processed user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. from baseband signals to RF band signals using one or more processors (102, 202).
  • one or more transceivers (106, 206) may include an (analog) oscillator and/or filter.
  • Fig. 21 shows another example of a wireless device applied to the present invention.
  • the wireless device can be implemented in various forms depending on the use-example/service (see Fig. 19).
  • the wireless device (100, 200) corresponds to the wireless device (100, 200) of FIG. 20 and may be composed of various elements, components, units/units, and/or modules.
  • the wireless device (100, 200) may include a communication unit (110), a control unit (120), a memory unit (130), and an additional element (140).
  • the communication unit may include a communication circuit (112) and a transceiver(s) (114).
  • the communication circuit (112) may include one or more processors (102, 202) and/or one or more memories (104, 204) of FIG. 21.
  • the transceiver(s) (114) may include one or more transceivers (106, 206) and/or one or more antennas (108, 208) of FIG. 20.
  • the control unit (120) is electrically connected to the communication unit (110), the memory unit (130), and the additional elements (140) and controls overall operations of the wireless device.
  • the control unit (120) may control electrical/mechanical operations of the wireless device based on programs/codes/commands/information stored in the memory unit (130).
  • control unit (120) may transmit information stored in the memory unit (130) to an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface through the communication unit (110), or may store information received from an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface in the memory unit (130).
  • an external device e.g., another communication device
  • the control unit (120) may transmit information stored in the memory unit (130) to an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface through the communication unit (110), or may store information received from an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface in the memory unit (130).
  • the additional element (140) may be configured in various ways depending on the type of the wireless device.
  • the additional element (140) may include at least one of a power unit/battery, an input/output unit (I/O unit), a driving unit, and a computing unit.
  • the wireless device may be implemented in the form of a robot (FIG. 19, 100a), a vehicle (FIG. 19, 100b-1, 100b-2), an XR device (FIG. 19, 100c), a portable device (FIG. 19, 100d), a home appliance (FIG. 19, 100e), an IoT device (FIG.
  • Wireless devices may be mobile or stationary, depending on the use/service.
  • various elements, components, units/parts, and/or modules within the wireless device (100, 200) may be entirely interconnected via a wired interface, or at least some may be wirelessly connected via a communication unit (110).
  • the control unit (120) and the communication unit (110) may be wired, and the control unit (120) and the first unit (e.g., 130, 140) may be wirelessly connected via the communication unit (110).
  • each element, component, unit/part, and/or module within the wireless device (100, 200) may further include one or more elements.
  • the control unit (120) may be composed of one or more processor sets.
  • control unit (120) may be composed of a set of a communication control processor, an application processor, an ECU (Electronic Control Unit), a graphics processing processor, a memory control processor, etc.
  • memory unit (130) may be composed of RAM (Random Access Memory), DRAM (Dynamic RAM), ROM (Read Only Memory), flash memory, volatile memory, non-volatile memory, and/or a combination thereof.
  • Fig. 22 illustrates a vehicle or autonomous vehicle applied to the present invention.
  • the vehicle or autonomous vehicle may be implemented as a mobile robot, a car, a train, a manned/unmanned aerial vehicle (AV), a ship, etc.
  • AV manned/unmanned aerial vehicle
  • a vehicle or autonomous vehicle may include an antenna unit (108), a communication unit (110), a control unit (120), a driving unit (140a), a power supply unit (140b), a sensor unit (140c), and an autonomous driving unit (140d).
  • the antenna unit (108) may be configured as a part of the communication unit (110).
  • Blocks 110/130/140a to 140d correspond to blocks 110/130/140 of FIG. 21, respectively.
  • the communication unit (110) can transmit and receive signals (e.g., data, control signals, etc.) with external devices such as other vehicles, base stations (e.g., base stations, road side units, etc.), servers, etc.
  • the control unit (120) can control elements of the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) to perform various operations.
  • the control unit (120) can include an ECU (Electronic Control Unit).
  • the drive unit (140a) can drive the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) on the ground.
  • the drive unit (140a) can include an engine, a motor, a power train, wheels, brakes, a steering device, etc.
  • the power supply unit (140b) supplies power to the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) and can include a wired/wireless charging circuit, a battery, etc.
  • the sensor unit (140c) can obtain vehicle status, surrounding environment information, user information, etc.
  • the sensor unit (140c) may include an IMU (inertial measurement unit) sensor, a collision sensor, a wheel sensor, a speed sensor, an incline sensor, a weight detection sensor, a heading sensor, a position module, a vehicle forward/backward sensor, a battery sensor, a fuel sensor, a tire sensor, a steering sensor, a temperature sensor, a humidity sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, a pedal position sensor, etc.
  • IMU intial measurement unit
  • the autonomous driving unit (140d) may implement a technology for maintaining a driving lane, a technology for automatically controlling speed such as adaptive cruise control, a technology for automatically driving along a set path, a technology for automatically setting a path and driving when a destination is set, etc.
  • the communication unit (110) can receive map data, traffic information data, etc. from an external server.
  • the autonomous driving unit (140d) can generate an autonomous driving route and a driving plan based on the acquired data.
  • the control unit (120) can control the driving unit (140a) so that the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) moves along the autonomous driving route according to the driving plan (e.g., speed/direction control).
  • the communication unit (110) can irregularly/periodically acquire the latest traffic information data from an external server and can acquire surrounding traffic information data from surrounding vehicles.
  • the sensor unit (140c) can acquire vehicle status and surrounding environment information during autonomous driving.
  • the autonomous driving unit (140d) can update the autonomous driving route and driving plan based on the newly acquired data/information.
  • the communication unit (110) can transmit information on the vehicle location, autonomous driving route, driving plan, etc. to an external server.
  • An external server can predict traffic information data in advance using AI technology, etc. based on information collected from vehicles or autonomous vehicles, and provide the predicted traffic information data to the vehicles or autonomous vehicles.
  • the wireless communication technology implemented in the wireless device (XXX, YYY) of the present specification may include LTE, NR, and 6G, as well as Narrowband Internet of Things for low-power communication.
  • NB-IoT technology may be an example of LPWAN (Low Power Wide Area Network) technology, and may be implemented with standards such as LTE Cat NB1 and/or LTE Cat NB2, and is not limited to the above-described names.
  • the wireless communication technology implemented in the wireless device (XXX, YYY) of the present specification may perform communication based on LTE-M technology.
  • LTE-M technology may be an example of LPWAN technology, and may be called by various names such as eMTC (enhanced Machine Type Communication).
  • the LTE-M technology can be implemented by at least one of various standards such as 1) LTE CAT 0, 2) LTE Cat M1, 3) LTE Cat M2, 4) LTE non-BL (non-Bandwidth Limited), 5) LTE-MTC, 6) LTE Machine Type Communication, and/or 7) LTE M, and is not limited to the above-described names.
  • the wireless communication technology implemented in the wireless device (XXX, YYY) of the present specification can include at least one of ZigBee, Bluetooth, and Low Power Wide Area Network (LPWAN) considering low-power communication, and is not limited to the above-described names.
  • ZigBee technology can create PAN (personal area networks) related to small/low-power digital communication based on various standards such as IEEE 802.15.4, and can be called by various names.
  • the embodiments of the present invention have been mainly described with a focus on the signal transmission/reception relationship between a terminal and a base station.
  • This transmission/reception relationship is equally/similarly extended to signal transmission/reception between a terminal and a relay or a base station and a relay.
  • a specific operation described as being performed by a base station in this document may, in some cases, be performed by its upper node. That is, it is obvious that various operations performed for communication with a terminal in a network composed of a plurality of network nodes including a base station may be performed by the base station or other network nodes other than the base station.
  • the base station may be replaced with terms such as a fixed station, a Node B, an eNode B (eNB), an access point, etc.
  • the terminal may be replaced with terms such as a UE (User Equipment), an MS (Mobile Station), an MSS (Mobile Subscriber Station), etc.
  • Embodiments according to the present invention can be implemented by various means, for example, hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof.
  • an embodiment of the present invention can be implemented by one or more ASICs (application specific integrated circuits), DSPs (digital signal processors), DSPDs (digital signal processing devices), PLDs (programmable logic devices), FPGAs (field programmable gate arrays), processors, controllers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, etc.
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • DSPDs digital signal processing devices
  • PLDs programmable logic devices
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • processors controllers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, etc.
  • one embodiment of the present invention may be implemented in the form of a module, procedure, function, etc. that performs the functions or operations described above.
  • the software code may be stored in a memory unit and may be driven by a processor.
  • the memory unit may be located inside or outside the processor and may exchange data with the processor by various means already known.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed are a method for a first relay terminal to perform multi-hop-based relay and a device therefor in a wireless communication system according to various embodiments. The method comprises the steps of: forming a first hop connection and a second hop connection for the multi-hop-based relay; monitoring whether a radio link failure (RLF) occurs in the first hop connection or the second hop connection; and, on the basis that an RLF occurred in one of the first hop connection or the second hop connection, triggering a reselection procedure of the relay terminal for the one hop connection.

Description

무선 통신 시스템에서 릴레이 통신을 수행하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치Method for performing relay communication in a wireless communication system and device therefor

무선 통신 시스템에서 릴레이 단말이 멀티 홉에 기반한 릴레이 통신을 수행하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치에 대한 것이다.The present invention relates to a method for performing relay communication based on multi-hop by a relay terminal in a wireless communication system and a device therefor.

무선 통신 시스템은 가용한 시스템 자원(예를 들어, 대역폭, 전송 전력 등)을 공유하여 다중 사용자와의 통신을 지원하는 다중 접속(multiple access) 시스템이다. 다중 접속 시스템의 예로는 CDMA(code division multiple access) 시스템, FDMA(frequency division multiple access) 시스템, TDMA(time division multiple access) 시스템, OFDMA(orthogonal frequency division multiple access) 시스템, SC-FDMA(single carrier frequency division multiple access) 시스템, MC-FDMA(multi carrier frequency division multiple access) 시스템 등이 있다.A wireless communication system is a multiple access system that supports communication with multiple users by sharing available system resources (e.g., bandwidth, transmission power, etc.). Examples of multiple access systems include a CDMA (code division multiple access) system, an FDMA (frequency division multiple access) system, a TDMA (time division multiple access) system, an OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access) system, an SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access) system, and an MC-FDMA (multi carrier frequency division multiple access) system.

사이드링크(sidelink, SL)란 단말(User Equipment, UE)들 간에 직접적인 링크를 설정하여, 기지국(Base Station, BS)을 거치지 않고, 단말 간에 음성 또는 데이터 등을 직접 주고 받는 통신 방식을 말한다. SL는 급속도로 증가하는 데이터 트래픽에 따른 기지국의 부담을 해결할 수 있는 하나의 방안으로서 고려되고 있다.Sidelink (SL) refers to a communication method that establishes a direct link between user equipment (UE) to directly exchange voice or data between terminals without going through a base station (BS). SL is being considered as a solution to solve the burden on base stations due to rapidly increasing data traffic.

V2X(vehicle-to-everything)는 유/무선 통신을 통해 다른 차량, 보행자, 인프라가 구축된 사물 등과 정보를 교환하는 통신 기술을 의미한다. V2X는 V2V(vehicle-to-vehicle), V2I(vehicle-to-infrastructure), V2N(vehicle-to- network) 및 V2P(vehicle-to-pedestrian)와 같은 4 가지 유형으로 구분될 수 있다. V2X 통신은 PC5 인터페이스 및/또는 Uu 인터페이스를 통해 제공될 수 있다.V2X (vehicle-to-everything) refers to a communication technology that exchanges information with other vehicles, pedestrians, and objects with built-in infrastructure through wired/wireless communication. V2X can be divided into four types: V2V (vehicle-to-vehicle), V2I (vehicle-to-infrastructure), V2N (vehicle-to-network), and V2P (vehicle-to-pedestrian). V2X communication can be provided through the PC5 interface and/or the Uu interface.

한편, 더욱 많은 통신 기기들이 더욱 큰 통신 용량을 요구하게 됨에 따라, 기존의 무선 액세스 기술(Radio Access Technology, RAT)에 비해 향상된 모바일 광대역 (mobile broadband) 통신에 대한 필요성이 대두되고 있다. 이에 따라, 신뢰도(reliability) 및 지연(latency)에 민감한 서비스 또는 단말을 고려한 통신 시스템이 논의되고 있는데, 개선된 이동 광대역 통신, 매시브 MTC(Machine Type Communication), URLLC(Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication) 등을 고려한 차세대 무선 접속 기술을 새로운 RAT(new radio access technology) 또는 NR(new radio)이라 칭할 수 있다. NR에서도 V2X(vehicle-to-everything) 통신이 지원될 수 있다.Meanwhile, as more and more communication devices require greater communication capacity, there is a growing need for improved mobile broadband communication over existing Radio Access Technology (RAT). Accordingly, communication systems that consider services or terminals sensitive to reliability and latency are being discussed, and the next-generation radio access technology that considers improved mobile broadband communication, massive MTC (Machine Type Communication), URLLC (Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication), etc. can be called new RAT (new radio access technology) or NR (new radio). V2X (vehicle-to-everything) communication can also be supported in NR.

도 1은 NR 이전의 RAT에 기반한 V2X 통신과 NR에 기반한 V2X 통신을 비교하여 설명하기 위한 도면이다Figure 1 is a diagram for explaining and comparing V2X communication based on RAT before NR and V2X communication based on NR.

V2X 통신과 관련하여, NR 이전의 RAT에서는 BSM(Basic Safety Message), CAM(Cooperative Awareness Message), DENM(Decentralized Environmental Notification Message)과 같은 V2X 메시지를 기반으로, 안전 서비스(safety service)를 제공하는 방안이 주로 논의되었다. V2X 메시지는, 위치 정보, 동적 정보, 속성 정보 등을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 주기적인 메시지(periodic message) 타입의 CAM, 및/또는 이벤트 트리거 메시지(event triggered message) 타입의 DENM을 다른 단말에게 전송할 수 있다.In relation to V2X communication, in RATs prior to NR, methods for providing safety services based on V2X messages such as Basic Safety Message (BSM), Cooperative Awareness Message (CAM), and Decentralized Environmental Notification Message (DENM) have been mainly discussed. V2X messages may include location information, dynamic information, attribute information, etc. For example, a terminal may transmit a CAM of a periodic message type and/or a DENM of an event triggered message type to another terminal.

예를 들어, CAM은 방향 및 속도와 같은 차량의 동적 상태 정보, 치수와 같은 차량 정적 데이터, 외부 조명 상태, 경로 내역 등 기본 차량 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 CAM을 방송할 수 있으며, CAM의 지연(latency)은 100ms보다 작을 수 있다. 예를 들어, 차량의 고장, 사고 등의 돌발적인 상황이 발행하는 경우, 단말은 DENM을 생성하여 다른 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말의 전송 범위 내에 있는 모든 차량은 CAM 및/또는 DENM을 수신할 수 있다. 이 경우, DENM은 CAM 보다 높은 우선 순위를 가질 수 있다.For example, CAM may include basic vehicle information such as vehicle dynamic status information such as direction and speed, vehicle static data such as dimensions, exterior lighting status, and route history. For example, the terminal may broadcast CAM, and the latency of the CAM may be less than 100ms. For example, when an emergency situation such as vehicle breakdown or accident occurs, the terminal may generate DENM and transmit it to other terminals. For example, all vehicles within the transmission range of the terminal may receive CAM and/or DENM. In this case, DENM may have a higher priority than CAM.

이후, V2X 통신과 관련하여, 다양한 V2X 시나리오들이 NR에서 제시되고 있다. 예를 들어, 다양한 V2X 시나리오들은, 차량 플라투닝(vehicle platooning), 향상된 드라이빙(advanced driving), 확장된 센서들(extended sensors), 리모트 드라이빙(remote driving) 등을 포함할 수 있다. Since then, various V2X scenarios have been proposed in NR in relation to V2X communication. For example, various V2X scenarios may include vehicle platooning, advanced driving, extended sensors, and remote driving.

예를 들어, 차량 플라투닝을 기반으로, 차량들은 동적으로 그룹을 형성하여 함께 이동할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 차량 플라투닝에 기반한 플라툰 동작들(platoon operations)을 수행하기 위해, 상기 그룹에 속하는 차량들은 선두 차량으로부터 주기적인 데이터를 수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 그룹에 속하는 차량들은 주기적인 데이터를 이용하여, 차량들 사이의 간격을 줄이거나 넓힐 수 있다. For example, based on vehicle platooning, vehicles can dynamically form a group and move together. For example, in order to perform platoon operations based on vehicle platooning, vehicles belonging to the group can receive periodic data from the lead vehicle. For example, vehicles belonging to the group can use the periodic data to reduce or increase the gap between vehicles.

예를 들어, 향상된 드라이빙을 기반으로, 차량은 반자동화 또는 완전 자동화될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 각 차량은 근접 차량 및/또는 근접 로지컬 엔티티(logical entity)의 로컬 센서(local sensor)에서 획득된 데이터를 기반으로, 궤도(trajectories) 또는 기동(maneuvers)을 조정할 수 있다. 또한, 예를 들어, 각 차량은 근접한 차량들과 드라이빙 인텐션(driving intention)을 상호 공유할 수 있다. For example, based on improved driving, the vehicles can be semi-autonomous or fully automated. For example, each vehicle can adjust its trajectories or maneuvers based on data acquired from local sensors of nearby vehicles and/or nearby logical entities. Additionally, for example, each vehicle can share driving intentions with nearby vehicles.

예를 들어, 확장 센서들을 기반으로, 로컬 센서들을 통해 획득된 로 데이터(raw data) 또는 처리된 데이터(processed data), 또는 라이브 비디오 데이터(live video data)는 차량, 로지컬 엔티티, 보행자들의 단말 및/또는 V2X 응용 서버 간에 상호 교환될 수 있다. 따라서, 예를 들어, 차량은 자체 센서를 이용하여 감지할 수 있는 환경 보다 향상된 환경을 인식할 수 있다. For example, based on the extended sensors, raw data or processed data, or live video data acquired through local sensors can be exchanged between vehicles, logical entities, pedestrian terminals, and/or V2X application servers. Thus, for example, the vehicle can perceive the environment better than it can perceive using its own sensors.

예를 들어, 리모트 드라이빙을 기반으로, 운전을 하지 못하는 사람 또는 위험한 환경에 위치한 리모트 차량을 위해, 리모트 드라이버 또는 V2X 애플리케이션은 상기 리모트 차량을 동작 또는 제어할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 대중 교통과 같이 경로를 예측할 수 있는 경우, 클라우드 컴퓨팅 기반의 드라이빙이 상기 리모트 차량의 동작 또는 제어에 이용될 수 있다. 또한, 예를 들어, 클라우드 기반의 백엔드 서비스 플랫폼(cloud-based back-end service platform)에 대한 액세스가 리모트 드라이빙을 위해 고려될 수 있다.For example, based on remote driving, for a person who cannot drive or a remote vehicle located in a dangerous environment, a remote driver or V2X application can operate or control the remote vehicle. For example, in the case of predictable paths such as public transportation, cloud computing-based driving can be used to operate or control the remote vehicle. In addition, for example, access to a cloud-based back-end service platform can be considered for remote driving.

한편, 차량 플라투닝, 향상된 드라이빙, 확장된 센서들, 리모트 드라이빙 등 다양한 V2X 시나리오들에 대한 서비스 요구사항(service requirements)들을 구체화하는 방안이 NR에 기반한 V2X 통신에서 논의되고 있다.Meanwhile, a method to specify service requirements for various V2X scenarios, such as vehicle platooning, enhanced driving, expanded sensors, and remote driving, is being discussed in NR-based V2X communications.

본 발명이 이루고자 하는 기술적 과제는 보다 정확하고 효율적으로 릴레이 통신을 수행하는 방법을 제공하는데 있다.The technical problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a method for performing relay communication more accurately and efficiently.

기술적 과제들은 이상에서 언급한 기술적 과제들로 제한되지 않으며, 언급하지 않은 또 다른 기술적 과제들은 아래의 기재로부터 본 발명이 속하는 기술분야에서 통상의 지식을 가진 자에게 명확하게 이해될 수 있을 것이다.The technical challenges are not limited to the technical challenges mentioned above, and other technical challenges not mentioned will be clearly understood by those skilled in the art to which the present invention belongs from the description below.

일 측면에 따른 무선 통신 시스템에서 제1 릴레이 단말이 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 수행하는 방법은 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 위한 제1 홉 연결 및 제2 홉 연결을 형성하는 단계; 상기 제1 홉 연결 또는 상기 제2 홉 연결에 대한 RLF (Radio Link Failure) 발생 여부를 모니터링하는 단계; 및 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결 중 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 RLF가 발생한 것에 기초하여, 상기 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차를 트리거하는 단계를 포함할 수 있다.A method for a first relay terminal to perform multi-hop based relaying in a wireless communication system according to one aspect may include: forming a first hop connection and a second hop connection for the multi-hop based relaying; monitoring whether an RLF (Radio Link Failure) occurs for the first hop connection or the second hop connection; and triggering a reselection procedure of a relay terminal for one of the first hop connection and the second hop connection based on the occurrence of an RLF for the one hop connection.

또는, 미리 설정된 시간 내에 상기 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차를 통한 새로운 릴레이 단말이 탐색되지 않은 것에 기초하여, 상기 제1 릴레이 단말은 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결 중 상기 RLF가 감지되지 않은 홉 연결을 통해 상기 하나의 홉 연결의 RLF 감지에 대한 RLF 감지 정보를 보고하는 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, based on the fact that a new relay terminal is not discovered through the reselection procedure of the relay terminal within a preset time, the first relay terminal is characterized in that it reports RLF detection information for RLF detection of the one hop connection through the hop connection in which the RLF is not detected among the first hop connection and the second hop connection.

또는, 상기 RLF 감지 정보는 상기 하나의 홉 연결에 대응하는 홉 넘버의 값을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the RLF detection information is characterized by including a value of a hop number corresponding to the one hop connection.

또는, 상기 RLF 감지 정보는 상기 RLF가 감지되지 않은 홉 연결을 해제하기 위한 해제 메시지를 통해 보고되고, 상기 해제 메시지는 상기 RLF의 감지를 원인 값으로 설정된 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the RLF detection information is reported via a release message for releasing a hop connection in which the RLF is not detected, and the release message is characterized in that the detection of the RLF is set as a cause value.

또는, 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결 중 상기 RLF가 감지되지 않은 홉 연결이 소스 리모트 단말 또는 네트워크와 형성된 것에 기초하여, 상기 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차는 트리거되지 않은 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the reselection procedure of the relay terminal is not triggered based on the fact that a hop connection in which the RLF is not detected among the first hop connection and the second hop connection is formed with the source remote terminal or the network.

또는, 상기 제1 릴레이 단말은 상기 하나의 홉 연결의 RLF 발생에 대한 정보를 상기 소스 리모트 단말 또는 상기 네트워크에 보고하는 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the first relay terminal is characterized in that it reports information about the occurrence of RLF of the one hop connection to the source remote terminal or the network.

또는, 상기 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차를 통해 새로운 릴레이 단말과 상기 하나의 홉 연결을 재형성하는 단계; 및 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결 중 상기 RLF가 감지되지 않은 홉 연결을 통해 상기 하나의 홉 연결의 재형성에 대한 정보를 보고하는 단계를 더 포함하는 것을 특징으로 한다.Or, the method further comprises a step of re-establishing the one-hop connection with a new relay terminal through a re-selection procedure of the relay terminal; and a step of reporting information on the re-establishment of the one-hop connection through a hop connection in which the RLF is not detected among the first hop connection and the second hop connection.

또는, 상기 하나의 홉 연결의 재형성에 대한 정보는 상기 하나의 홉 연결의 재형성으로 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 위한 전체 홉 수가 증가한 경우에만 보고되는 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, information on the re-establishment of said one-hop connection is characterized in that it is reported only when the total number of hops for said multi-hop based relay increases due to the re-establishment of said one-hop connection.

또는, 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이는 리모트 단말과 네트워크 간의 데이터를 송수신하기 위한 U2N (User equipment to Network) 릴레이인 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the multi-hop based relay is characterized as a U2N (User equipment to Network) relay for transmitting and receiving data between a remote terminal and a network.

또는, 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이는 소스 리모트 단말과 타겟 리모트 단말 간의 데이터를 송수신하기 위한 U2U (User equipment to User equipment) 릴레이인 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the multi-hop based relay is characterized as a U2U (User equipment to User equipment) relay for transmitting and receiving data between a source remote terminal and a target remote terminal.

다른 일 측면에 따라서 상술된 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 수행하기 위한 방법을 수행하기 위한 명령어들을 기록한 비일시적 컴퓨터 판독가능 저장 매체가 제공될 수 있다.According to another aspect, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having recorded thereon instructions for performing the method for performing the multi-hop based relay described above may be provided.

또 다른 일 측면에 따라서 상술된 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 수행하기 위한 방법을 수행하는 제1 릴레이 단말이 제공될 수 있다.According to another aspect, a first relay terminal performing the method for performing the multi-hop based relay described above may be provided.

또 다른 일 측면에 따라서 상술된 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 수행하는 제1 릴레이 단말을 제어하기 위한 프로세싱 장치가 제공될 수 있다.According to another aspect, a processing device may be provided for controlling a first relay terminal performing the multi-hop based relay described above.

본 발명의 일 실시예에 따르면 무선 통신 시스템에서 릴레이 통신을 보다 정확하고 효율적으로 수행될 수 있다.According to one embodiment of the present invention, relay communication can be performed more accurately and efficiently in a wireless communication system.

다양한 실시예에서 얻을 수 있는 효과는 이상에서 언급한 효과들로 제한되지 않으며, 언급하지 않은 또 다른 효과들은 아래의 기재로부터 본 발명이 속하는 기술분야에서 통상의 지식을 가진 자에게 명확하게 이해될 수 있을 것이다.The effects that can be obtained in various embodiments are not limited to the effects mentioned above, and other effects not mentioned will be clearly understood by those skilled in the art to which the present invention pertains from the description below.

본 명세서에 첨부되는 도면은 본 발명에 대한 이해를 제공하기 위한 것으로서 본 발명의 다양한 실시형태들을 나타내고 명세서의 기재와 함께 본 발명의 원리를 설명하기 위한 것이다. The drawings appended hereto are included to provide an understanding of the present invention and to illustrate various embodiments of the present invention and, together with the description of the specification, serve to explain the principles of the present invention.

도 1은 NR 이전의 RAT에 기반한 V2X 통신과 NR에 기반한 V2X 통신을 비교하여 설명하기 위한 도면이다Figure 1 is a diagram for explaining and comparing V2X communication based on RAT before NR and V2X communication based on NR.

도 2은 LTE 시스템의 구조를 나타낸다.Figure 2 shows the structure of the LTE system.

도 3은 NR 시스템의 구조를 나타낸다.Figure 3 shows the structure of the NR system.

도 4은 NR의 무선 프레임의 구조를 나타낸다.Figure 4 shows the structure of a radio frame of NR.

도 5은 NR 프레임의 슬롯 구조를 나타낸다.Figure 5 shows the slot structure of an NR frame.

도 6은 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따른, 6G 시스템에서 제공 가능한 통신 구조를 나타낸다.FIG. 6 illustrates a communication structure that can be provided in a 6G system according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.

도 7는 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따른, 전자기 스펙트럼을 나타낸다.FIG. 7 illustrates an electromagnetic spectrum according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.

도 8는 SL 통신을 위한 무선 프로토콜 구조(radio protocol architecture)를 나타낸다.Figure 8 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication.

도 9는 V2X 또는 SL 통신을 수행하는 단말을 나타낸다.Figure 9 shows a terminal performing V2X or SL communication.

도 10는 V2X 또는 SL 통신을 위한 자원 단위를 나타낸다.Figure 10 shows resource units for V2X or SL communication.

도 11은 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따른, BWP의 일 예를 나타낸다. FIG. 11 illustrates an example of a BWP according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.

도 12는 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따라, 단말이 자원 할당 모드에 따라 V2X 또는 SL 통신을 수행하는 절차를 나타낸다. FIG. 12 illustrates a procedure for a terminal to perform V2X or SL communication according to a resource allocation mode according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.

도 13은 L2 U2N 릴레이 (UE-to-Network Relay)의 컨트롤 플레인 절차를 설명하기 위한 도면이다. Figure 13 is a diagram for explaining the control plane procedure of L2 U2N relay (UE-to-Network Relay).

도 14은 L2 U2U 릴레이 (UE-to-UE Relay)의 컨트롤 플레인 절차를 설명하기 위한 도면이다.Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the control plane procedure of L2 U2U relay (UE-to-UE Relay).

도 15 및 도 16은 릴레이 디스커버리 없이 U2U 릴레이 선택 (UE-to-UE Relay Selection)하는 절차를 설명하기 위한 도면이다.FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are diagrams for explaining a procedure for U2U relay selection (UE-to-UE Relay Selection) without relay discovery.

도 17은 L2 U2U 릴레이를 위한 평면 프로토콜 스택을 간략하게 도시한다.Figure 17 schematically illustrates a flat protocol stack for L2 U2U relay.

도 18은 제1 릴레이 단말이 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 수행하는 방법을 설명하기 위한 도면이다.Figure 18 is a diagram for explaining how a first relay terminal performs multi-hop based relay.

도 19은 본 발명에 적용되는 통신 시스템을 예시한다.Figure 19 illustrates a communication system applied to the present invention.

도 20은 본 발명에 적용될 수 있는 무선 기기를 예시한다.Figure 20 illustrates a wireless device that can be applied to the present invention.

도 21은 본 발명에 적용되는 무선 기기의 다른 예를 나타낸다. 무선 기기는 사용-예/서비스에 따라 다양한 형태로 구현될 수 있다Fig. 21 shows another example of a wireless device applied to the present invention. The wireless device can be implemented in various forms depending on the use-example/service.

도 22는 본 발명에 적용되는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량을 예시한다.Figure 22 illustrates a vehicle or autonomous vehicle to which the present invention is applied.

무선 통신 시스템은 가용한 시스템 자원(예를 들어, 대역폭, 전송 파워 등)을 공유하여 다중 사용자와의 통신을 지원하는 다중 접속(multiple access) 시스템이다. 다중 접속 시스템의 예로는 CDMA(code division multiple access) 시스템, FDMA(frequency division multiple access) 시스템, TDMA(time division multiple access) 시스템, OFDMA(orthogonal frequency division multiple access) 시스템, SC-FDMA(single carrier frequency division multiple access) 시스템, MC-FDMA(multi carrier frequency division multiple access) 시스템 등이 있다.A wireless communication system is a multiple access system that supports communication with multiple users by sharing available system resources (e.g., bandwidth, transmission power, etc.). Examples of multiple access systems include a CDMA (code division multiple access) system, an FDMA (frequency division multiple access) system, a TDMA (time division multiple access) system, an OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access) system, an SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access) system, and an MC-FDMA (multi carrier frequency division multiple access) system.

사이드링크(sidelink)란 단말(User Equipment, UE)들 간에 직접적인 링크를 설정하여, 기지국(Base Station, BS)을 거치지 않고, 단말 간에 음성 또는 데이터 등을 직접 주고 받는 통신 방식을 말한다. 사이드링크는 급속도로 증가하는 데이터 트래픽에 따른 기지국의 부담을 해결할 수 있는 하나의 방안으로서 고려되고 있다.Sidelink refers to a communication method that establishes a direct link between user equipment (UE) to directly exchange voice or data between terminals without going through a base station (BS). Sidelink is being considered as a solution to solve the burden on base stations due to rapidly increasing data traffic.

V2X(vehicle-to-everything)는 유/무선 통신을 통해 다른 차량, 보행자, 인프라가 구축된 사물 등과 정보를 교환하는 통신 기술을 의미한다. V2X는 V2V(vehicle-to-vehicle), V2I(vehicle-to-infrastructure), V2N(vehicle-to- network) 및 V2P(vehicle-to-pedestrian)와 같은 4 가지 유형으로 구분될 수 있다. V2X 통신은 PC5 인터페이스 및/또는 Uu 인터페이스를 통해 제공될 수 있다.V2X (vehicle-to-everything) refers to a communication technology that exchanges information with other vehicles, pedestrians, and objects with built-in infrastructure through wired/wireless communication. V2X can be divided into four types: V2V (vehicle-to-vehicle), V2I (vehicle-to-infrastructure), V2N (vehicle-to-network), and V2P (vehicle-to-pedestrian). V2X communication can be provided through the PC5 interface and/or the Uu interface.

한편, 더욱 많은 통신 기기들이 더욱 큰 통신 용량을 요구하게 됨에 따라, 기존의 무선 액세스 기술(Radio Access Technology, RAT)에 비해 향상된 모바일 광대역 (mobile broadband) 통신에 대한 필요성이 대두되고 있다. 이에 따라, 신뢰도(reliability) 및 지연(latency)에 민감한 서비스 또는 단말을 고려한 통신 시스템이 논의되고 있는데, 개선된 이동 광대역 통신, 매시브 MTC, URLLC(Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication) 등을 고려한 차세대 무선 접속 기술을 새로운 RAT(new radio access technology) 또는 NR(new radio)이라 칭할 수 있다. NR에서도 V2X(vehicle-to-everything) 통신이 지원될 수 있다.Meanwhile, as more and more communication devices require greater communication capacity, there is a growing need for improved mobile broadband communication over existing Radio Access Technology (RAT). Accordingly, communication systems that consider services or terminals sensitive to reliability and latency are being discussed, and the next-generation radio access technology that considers improved mobile broadband communication, massive MTC, and URLLC (Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication) can be called new RAT (new radio access technology) or NR (new radio). V2X (vehicle-to-everything) communication can also be supported in NR.

이하의 기술은 CDMA(code division multiple access), FDMA(frequency division multiple access), TDMA(time division multiple access), OFDMA(orthogonal frequency division multiple access), SC-FDMA(single carrier frequency division multiple access) 등과 같은 다양한 무선 통신 시스템에 사용될 수 있다. CDMA는 UTRA(universal terrestrial radio access)나 CDMA2000과 같은 무선 기술로 구현될 수 있다. TDMA는 GSM(global system for mobile communications)/GPRS(general packet radio service)/EDGE(enhanced data rates for GSM evolution)와 같은 무선 기술로 구현될 수 있다. OFDMA는 IEEE(institute of electrical and electronics engineers) 802.11(Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16(WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, E-UTRA(evolved UTRA) 등과 같은 무선 기술로 구현될 수 있다. IEEE 802.16m은 IEEE 802.16e의 진화로, IEEE 802.16e에 기반한 시스템과의 하위 호환성(backward compatibility)를 제공한다. UTRA는 UMTS(universal mobile telecommunications system)의 일부이다. 3GPP(3rd generation partnership project) LTE(long term evolution)은 E-UTRA(evolved-UMTS terrestrial radio access)를 사용하는 E-UMTS(evolved UMTS)의 일부로써, 하향링크에서 OFDMA를 채용하고 상향링크에서 SC-FDMA를 채용한다. LTE-A(advanced)는 3GPP LTE의 진화이다. The following technology can be used in various wireless communication systems, such as CDMA (code division multiple access), FDMA (frequency division multiple access), TDMA (time division multiple access), OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access), and SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access). CDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as UTRA (universal terrestrial radio access) or CDMA2000. TDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as GSM (global system for mobile communications)/GPRS (general packet radio service)/EDGE (enhanced data rates for GSM evolution). OFDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as IEEE (institute of electrical and electronics engineers) 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, E-UTRA (evolved UTRA). IEEE 802.16m is an evolution of IEEE 802.16e, providing backward compatibility with systems based on IEEE 802.16e. UTRA is part of UMTS (universal mobile telecommunications system). 3GPP (3rd generation partnership project) LTE (long term evolution) is a part of E-UMTS (evolved UMTS) that uses E-UTRA (evolved-UMTS terrestrial radio access), employing OFDMA in the downlink and SC-FDMA in the uplink. LTE-A (advanced) is an evolution of 3GPP LTE.

5G NR은 LTE-A의 후속 기술로서, 고성능, 저지연, 고가용성 등의 특성을 가지는 새로운 Clean-slate 형태의 이동 통신 시스템이다. 5G NR은 1GHz 미만의 저주파 대역에서부터 1GHz~10GHz의 중간 주파 대역, 24GHz 이상의 고주파(밀리미터파) 대역 등 사용 가능한 모든 스펙트럼 자원을 활용할 수 있다.5G NR is a new clean-slate type mobile communication system that is the successor technology to LTE-A and has the characteristics of high performance, low latency, and high availability. 5G NR can utilize all available spectrum resources, from low frequency bands below 1 GHz to intermediate frequency bands between 1 GHz and 10 GHz, and high frequency (millimeter wave) bands above 24 GHz.

설명을 명확하게 하기 위해, LTE-A 또는 5G NR을 위주로 기술하지만 실시예(들)의 기술적 사상이 이에 제한되는 것은 아니다.For clarity of explanation, the description will focus on LTE-A or 5G NR, but the technical idea of the embodiment(s) is not limited thereto.

도 2은 적용될 수 있는 LTE 시스템의 구조를 나타낸다. 이는 E-UTRAN(Evolved-UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network), 또는 LTE(Long Term Evolution)/LTE-A 시스템이라고 불릴 수 있다.Figure 2 shows the structure of an applicable LTE system. This may be called an Evolved-UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN), or a Long Term Evolution (LTE)/LTE-A system.

도 2을 참조하면, E-UTRAN은 단말(10)에게 제어 평면(control plane)과 사용자 평면(user plane)을 제공하는 기지국(20; Base Station, BS)을 포함한다. 단말(10)은 고정되거나 이동성을 가질 수 있으며, MS(Mobile Station), UT(User Terminal), SS(Subscriber Station), MT(Mobile Terminal), 무선기기(Wireless Device) 등 다른 용어로 불릴 수 있다. 기지국(20)은 단말(10)과 통신하는 고정된 지점(fixed station)을 말하며, eNB(evolved-NodeB), BTS(Base Transceiver System), 액세스 포인트(Access Point) 등 다른 용어로 불릴 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 2, the E-UTRAN includes a base station (20; BS) that provides a control plane and a user plane to a terminal (10). The terminal (10) may be fixed or mobile, and may be called by other terms such as a mobile station (MS), a user terminal (UT), a subscriber station (SS), a mobile terminal (MT), a wireless device, etc. The base station (20) refers to a fixed station that communicates with the terminal (10), and may be called by other terms such as an evolved-NodeB (eNB), a base transceiver system (BTS), an access point, etc.

기지국(20)들은 X2 인터페이스를 통하여 서로 연결될 수 있다. 기지국(20)은 S1 인터페이스를 통해 EPC(Evolved Packet Core, 30), 보다 상세하게는 S1-MME를 통해 MME(Mobility Management Entity)와 S1-U를 통해 S-GW(Serving Gateway)와 연결된다. Base stations (20) can be connected to each other through the X2 interface. The base station (20) is connected to an EPC (Evolved Packet Core, 30) through the S1 interface, more specifically, to an MME (Mobility Management Entity) through the S1-MME and to an S-GW (Serving Gateway) through the S1-U.

EPC(30)는 MME, S-GW 및 P-GW(Packet Data Network-Gateway)로 구성된다. MME는 단말의 접속 정보나 단말의 능력에 관한 정보를 가지고 있으며, 이러한 정보는 단말의 이동성 관리에 주로 사용된다. S-GW는 E-UTRAN을 종단점으로 갖는 게이트웨이이며, P-GW는 PDN을 종단점으로 갖는 게이트웨이이다.EPC (30) consists of MME, S-GW, and P-GW (Packet Data Network-Gateway). MME has terminal connection information or terminal capability information, and this information is mainly used for terminal mobility management. S-GW is a gateway with E-UTRAN as an end point, and P-GW is a gateway with PDN as an end point.

단말과 네트워크 사이의 무선인터페이스 프로토콜(Radio Interface Protocol)의 계층들은 통신시스템에서 널리 알려진 개방형 시스템간 상호접속(Open System Interconnection, OSI) 기준 모델의 하위 3개 계층을 바탕으로 L1 (제 1 계층), L2 (제 2 계층), L3(제 3 계층)로 구분될 수 있다. 이 중에서 제 1 계층에 속하는 물리 계층은 물리 채널(Physical Channel)을 이용한 정보전송서비스(Information Transfer Service)를 제공하며, 제 3 계층에 위치하는 RRC(Radio Resource Control) 계층은 단말과 네트워크 간에 무선 자원을 제어하는 역할을 수행한다. 이를 위해 RRC 계층은 단말과 기지국간 RRC 메시지를 교환한다.The layers of the Radio Interface Protocol between the terminal and the network can be divided into L1 (the first layer), L2 (the second layer), and L3 (the third layer) based on the three lower layers of the Open System Interconnection (OSI) standard model, which is widely known in communication systems. Among these, the physical layer belonging to the first layer provides an information transfer service using a physical channel, and the RRC (Radio Resource Control) layer located in the third layer controls radio resources between the terminal and the network. To this end, the RRC layer exchanges RRC messages between the terminal and the base station.

도 3은 NR 시스템의 구조를 나타낸다.Figure 3 shows the structure of the NR system.

도 3을 참조하면, NG-RAN은 단말에게 사용자 평면 및 제어 평면 프로토콜 종단(termination)을 제공하는 gNB 및/또는 eNB를 포함할 수 있다. 도 7에서는 gNB만을 포함하는 경우를 예시한다. gNB 및 eNB는 상호 간에 Xn 인터페이스로 연결되어 있다. gNB 및 eNB는 5세대 코어 네트워크(5G Core Network: 5GC)와 NG 인터페이스를 통해 연결되어 있다. 보다 구체적으로, AMF(access and mobility management function)과는 NG-C 인터페이스를 통해 연결되고, UPF(user plane function)과는 NG-U 인터페이스를 통해 연결된다. Referring to FIG. 3, the NG-RAN may include a gNB and/or an eNB that provides user plane and control plane protocol termination to the UE. FIG. 7 illustrates a case where only a gNB is included. The gNB and the eNB are connected to each other via an Xn interface. The gNB and the eNB are connected to a 5th generation core network (5G Core Network: 5GC) via an NG interface. More specifically, they are connected to an access and mobility management function (AMF) via an NG-C interface, and to a user plane function (UPF) via an NG-U interface.

도 4은 NR의 무선 프레임의 구조를 나타낸다.Figure 4 shows the structure of a radio frame of NR.

도 4을 참조하면, NR에서 상향링크 및 하향링크 전송에서 무선 프레임을 사용할 수 있다. 무선 프레임은 10ms의 길이를 가지며, 2개의 5ms 하프-프레임(Half-Frame, HF)으로 정의될 수 있다. 하프-프레임은 5개의 1ms 서브프레임(Subframe, SF)을 포함할 수 있다. 서브프레임은 하나 이상의 슬롯으로 분할될 수 있으며, 서브프레임 내 슬롯 개수는 부반송파 간격(Subcarrier Spacing, SCS)에 따라 결정될 수 있다. 각 슬롯은 CP(cyclic prefix)에 따라 12개 또는 14개의 OFDM(A) 심볼을 포함할 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 4, a radio frame can be used in uplink and downlink transmission in NR. A radio frame has a length of 10 ms and can be defined as two 5 ms half-frames (Half-Frames, HF). A half-frame can include five 1 ms subframes (Subframes, SF). A subframe can be divided into one or more slots, and the number of slots in a subframe can be determined according to the subcarrier spacing (SCS). Each slot can include 12 or 14 OFDM (A) symbols according to the cyclic prefix (CP).

노멀 CP(normal CP)가 사용되는 경우, 각 슬롯은 14개의 심볼을 포함할 수 있다. 확장 CP가 사용되는 경우, 각 슬롯은 12개의 심볼을 포함할 수 있다. 여기서, 심볼은 OFDM 심볼 (또는, CP-OFDM 심볼), SC-FDMA(Single Carrier - FDMA) 심볼 (또는, DFT-s-OFDM(Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM) 심볼)을 포함할 수 있다.When normal CP is used, each slot can include 14 symbols. When extended CP is used, each slot can include 12 symbols. Here, the symbols can include OFDM symbols (or CP-OFDM symbols), SC-FDMA (Single Carrier - FDMA) symbols (or DFT-s-OFDM (Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM) symbols).

다음 표 1은 노멀 CP가 사용되는 경우, SCS 설정(u)에 따라 슬롯 별 심볼의 개수((Nslot symb), 프레임 별 슬롯의 개수((Nframe,u slot)와 서브프레임 별 슬롯의 개수((Nsubframe,u slot)를 예시한다.Table 1 below illustrates the number of symbols per slot ((N slot symb ), the number of slots per frame ((N frame,u slot )) and the number of slots per subframe ((N subframe,u slot ) ) depending on the SCS setting (u) when normal CP is used.

SCS (15*2u)SCS (15*2 u ) Nslot symb N slot symb Nframe,u slot N frame,u slot Nsubframe,u slot N subframe,u slot 15KHz (u=0)15KHz (u=0) 1414 1010 11 30KHz (u=1)30KHz (u=1) 1414 2020 22 60KHz (u=2)60KHz (u=2) 1414 4040 44 120KHz (u=3)120KHz (u=3) 1414 8080 88 240KHz (u=4)240KHz (u=4) 1414 160160 1616

표 2는 확장 CP가 사용되는 경우, SCS에 따라 슬롯 별 심볼의 개수, 프레임 별 슬롯의 개수와 서브프레임 별 슬롯의 개수를 예시한다.Table 2 illustrates the number of symbols per slot, the number of slots per frame, and the number of slots per subframe according to SCS when extended CP is used.

SCS (15*2u)SCS (15*2 u ) Nslot symb N slot symb Nframe,u slot N frame,u slot Nsubframe,u slot N subframe,u slot 60KHz (u=2)60KHz (u=2) 1212 4040 44

NR 시스템에서는 하나의 단말에게 병합되는 복수의 셀들 간에 OFDM(A) 뉴머놀로지(numerology)(예, SCS, CP 길이 등)가 상이하게 설정될 수 있다. 이에 따라, 동일한 개수의 심볼로 구성된 시간 자원(예, 서브프레임, 슬롯 또는 TTI)(편의상, TU(Time Unit)로 통칭)의 (절대 시간) 구간이 병합된 셀들 간에 상이하게 설정될 수 있다. In an NR system, OFDM(A) numerology (e.g., SCS, CP length, etc.) may be set differently between multiple cells that are merged into one terminal. Accordingly, the (absolute time) section of a time resource (e.g., subframe, slot, or TTI) (conveniently referred to as TU (Time Unit)) consisting of the same number of symbols may be set differently between the merged cells.

NR에서, 다양한 5G 서비스들을 지원하기 위한 다수의 뉴머놀로지(numerology) 또는 SCS가 지원될 수 있다. 예를 들어, SCS가 15kHz인 경우, 전통적인 셀룰러 밴드들에서의 넓은 영역(wide area)이 지원될 수 있고, SCS가 30kHz/60kHz인 경우, 밀집한-도시(dense-urban), 더 낮은 지연(lower latency) 및 더 넓은 캐리어 대역폭(wider carrier bandwidth)이 지원될 수 있다. SCS가 60kHz 또는 그보다 높은 경우, 위상 잡음(phase noise)을 극복하기 위해 24.25GHz보다 큰 대역폭이 지원될 수 있다.In NR, multiple numerologies or SCS can be supported to support various 5G services. For example, when the SCS is 15 kHz, wide area in traditional cellular bands can be supported, and when the SCS is 30 kHz/60 kHz, dense-urban, lower latency and wider carrier bandwidth can be supported. When the SCS is 60 kHz or higher, a bandwidth greater than 24.25 GHz can be supported to overcome phase noise.

NR 주파수 밴드(frequency band)는 두 가지 타입의 주파수 범위(frequency range)로 정의될 수 있다. 상기 두 가지 타입의 주파수 범위는 FR1 및 FR2일 수 있다. 주파수 범위의 수치는 변경될 수 있으며, 예를 들어, 상기 두 가지 타입의 주파수 범위는 하기 표 3과 같을 수 있다. NR 시스템에서 사용되는 주파수 범위 중 FR1은 "sub 6GHz range"를 의미할 수 있고, FR2는 "above 6GHz range"를 의미할 수 있고 밀리미터 웨이브(millimeter wave, mmW)로 불릴 수 있다.The NR frequency band can be defined by two types of frequency ranges. The two types of frequency ranges can be FR1 and FR2. The numerical value of the frequency range can be changed, and for example, the two types of frequency ranges can be as shown in Table 3 below. Among the frequency ranges used in the NR system, FR1 can mean "sub 6GHz range", and FR2 can mean "above 6GHz range" and can be called millimeter wave (mmW).

Frequency Range designationFrequency Range designation Corresponding frequency rangeCorresponding frequency range Subcarrier Spacing (SCS)Subcarrier Spacing (SCS) FR1FR1 450MHz - 6000MHz450MHz - 6000MHz 15, 30, 60kHz15, 30, 60kHz FR2FR2 24250MHz - 52600MHz24250MHz - 52600MHz 60, 120, 240kHz60, 120, 240kHz

상술한 바와 같이, NR 시스템의 주파수 범위의 수치는 변경될 수 있다. 예를 들어, FR1은 하기 표 4와 같이 410MHz 내지 7125MHz의 대역을 포함할 수 있다. 즉, FR1은 6GHz (또는 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz 등) 이상의 주파수 대역을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, FR1 내에서 포함되는 6GHz (또는 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz 등) 이상의 주파수 대역은 비면허 대역(unlicensed band)을 포함할 수 있다. 비면허 대역은 다양한 용도로 사용될 수 있고, 예를 들어 차량을 위한 통신(예를 들어, 자율주행)을 위해 사용될 수 있다.As described above, the numerical value of the frequency range of the NR system can be changed. For example, FR1 can include a band of 410 MHz to 7125 MHz as shown in Table 4 below. That is, FR1 can include a frequency band of 6 GHz (or 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz, etc.) or higher. For example, the frequency band of 6 GHz (or 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz, etc.) or higher included in FR1 can include an unlicensed band. The unlicensed band can be used for various purposes, for example, it can be used for communication for vehicles (e.g., autonomous driving).

Frequency Range designationFrequency Range designation Corresponding frequency rangeCorresponding frequency range Subcarrier Spacing (SCS)Subcarrier Spacing (SCS) FR1FR1 410MHz - 7125MHz410MHz - 7125MHz 15, 30, 60kHz15, 30, 60kHz FR2FR2 24250MHz - 52600MHz24250MHz - 52600MHz 60, 120, 240kHz60, 120, 240kHz

도 5은 NR 프레임의 슬롯 구조를 나타낸다.Figure 5 shows the slot structure of an NR frame.

도 5을 참조하면, 슬롯은 시간 영역에서 복수의 심볼들을 포함한다. 예를 들어, 노멀 CP의 경우 하나의 슬롯이 14개의 심볼을 포함하나, 확장 CP의 경우 하나의 슬롯이 12개의 심볼을 포함할 수 있다. 또는 노멀 CP의 경우 하나의 슬롯이 7개의 심볼을 포함하나, 확장 CP의 경우 하나의 슬롯이 6개의 심볼을 포함할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 5, a slot includes multiple symbols in the time domain. For example, in the case of a normal CP, one slot may include 14 symbols, but in the case of an extended CP, one slot may include 12 symbols. Or, in the case of a normal CP, one slot may include 7 symbols, but in the case of an extended CP, one slot may include 6 symbols.

반송파는 주파수 영역에서 복수의 부반송파들을 포함한다. RB(Resource Block)는 주파수 영역에서 복수(예를 들어, 12)의 연속한 부반송파로 정의될 수 있다. BWP(Bandwidth Part)는 주파수 영역에서 복수의 연속한 (P)RB((Physical) Resource Block)로 정의될 수 있으며, 하나의 뉴머놀로지(numerology)(예, SCS, CP 길이 등)에 대응될 수 있다. 반송파는 최대 N개(예를 들어, 5개)의 BWP를 포함할 수 있다. 데이터 통신은 활성화된 BWP를 통해서 수행될 수 있다. 각각의 요소는 자원 그리드에서 자원요소(Resource Element, RE)로 지칭될 수 있고, 하나의 복소 심볼이 맵핑될 수 있다.A carrier includes a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency domain. An RB (Resource Block) can be defined as a plurality (for example, 12) of consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain. A BWP (Bandwidth Part) can be defined as a plurality of consecutive (P)RBs ((Physical) Resource Blocks) in the frequency domain and can correspond to one numerology (for example, SCS, CP length, etc.). A carrier can include at most N (for example, 5) BWPs. Data communication can be performed through activated BWPs. Each element can be referred to as a Resource Element (RE) in the resource grid, and one complex symbol can be mapped.

한편, 단말과 단말 간 무선 인터페이스 또는 단말과 네트워크 간 무선 인터페이스는 L1 계층, L2 계층 및 L3 계층으로 구성될 수 있다. 본 개시의 다양한 실시 예에서, L1 계층은 물리(physical) 계층을 의미할 수 있다. 또한, 예를 들어, L2 계층은 MAC 계층, RLC 계층, PDCP 계층 및 SDAP 계층 중 적어도 하나를 의미할 수 있다. 또한, 예를 들어, L3 계층은 RRC 계층을 의미할 수 있다.Meanwhile, the wireless interface between terminals or between terminals and a network may be composed of an L1 layer, an L2 layer, and an L3 layer. In various embodiments of the present disclosure, the L1 layer may mean a physical layer. In addition, for example, the L2 layer may mean at least one of a MAC layer, an RLC layer, a PDCP layer, and an SDAP layer. In addition, for example, the L3 layer may mean an RRC layer.

도 6은 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따른, 6G 시스템에서 제공 가능한 통신 구조를 나타낸다. 도 6의 실시 예는 본 개시의 다양한 실시 예와 결합될 수 있다.FIG. 6 illustrates a communication structure that can be provided in a 6G system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The embodiment of FIG. 6 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

6G에서 새로운 네트워크 특성들은 다음과 같을 수 있다.New network characteristics in 6G could include:

- 위성 통합 네트워크(satellites integrated network)- Satellite integrated network

- 연결된 인텔리전스(connected intelligence): 이전 세대의 무선 통신 시스템과 달리 6G는 혁신적이며, "연결된 사물"에서 "연결된 지능"으로 무선 진화가 업데이트될 것이다. AI는 통신 절차의 각 단계(또는 후술할 신호 처리의 각 절차)에서 적용될 수 있다.- Connected intelligence: Unlike previous generations of wireless communication systems, 6G is revolutionary and will update the wireless evolution from “connected things” to “connected intelligence.” AI can be applied at each stage of the communication process (or at each stage of signal processing, as described below).

- 무선 정보 및 에너지 전달의 완벽한 통합(seamless integration wireless information and energy transfer)- Seamless integration of wireless information and energy transfer

- 유비쿼터스 슈퍼 3D 연결(ubiquitous super 3D connectivity): 드론 및 매우 낮은 지구 궤도 위성의 네트워크 및 핵심 네트워크 기능에 접속은 6G 유비쿼터스에서 슈퍼 3D 연결을 만들 것이다.- Ubiquitous super 3D connectivity: Access to networks and core network functions of drones and very low Earth orbit satellites will create ubiquitous super 3D connectivity in 6G.

위와 같은 6G의 새로운 네트워크 특성들에서 몇 가지 일반적인 요구 사항은 다음과 같을 수 있다.Some general requirements from the new network characteristics of 6G as mentioned above can be as follows:

- 스몰 셀 네트워크(small cell networks)- small cell networks

- 초 고밀도 이기종 네트워크(ultra-dense heterogeneous network)- Ultra-dense heterogeneous network

- 대용량 백홀(high-capacity backhaul)- High-capacity backhaul

- 모바일 기술과 통합된 레이더 기술: 통신을 통한 고정밀 지역화 (또는 위치 기반 서비스)는 6G 무선통신 시스템의 기능 중 하나이다. 따라서, 레이더 시스템은 6G 네트워크와 통합될 것이다.- Radar technology integrated with mobile technology: High-precision localization (or location-based services) through communications is one of the functions of 6G wireless communication systems. Therefore, radar systems will be integrated with 6G networks.

- 소프트화 및 가상화(softwarization and virtualization)- Softwarization and virtualization

이하, 6G 시스템의 핵심 구현 기술에 대하여 설명한다.Below, the core implementation technologies of the 6G system are described.

- 인공 지능(artificial intelligence): 통신에 AI를 도입하면 실시간 데이터 전송이 간소화되고 향상될 수 있다. AI는 수많은 분석을 사용하여 복잡한 대상 작업이 수행되는 방식을 결정할 수 있다. 즉, AI는 효율성을 높이고 처리 지연을 줄일 수 있다. 핸드 오버, 네트워크 선택, 자원 스케쥴링과 같은 시간 소모적인 작업은 AI를 사용함으로써 즉시 수행될 수 있다. AI는 M2M, 기계-대-인간 및 인간-대-기계 통신에서도 중요한 역할을 할 수 있다. 또한, AI는 BCI(Brain Computer Interface)에서 신속한 통신이 될 수 있다. AI 기반 통신 시스템은 메타 물질, 지능형 구조, 지능형 네트워크, 지능형 장치, 지능형 인지 라디오(radio), 자체 유지 무선 네트워크 및 머신 러닝에 의해 지원될 수 있다.- Artificial Intelligence: Introducing AI into communications can simplify and improve real-time data transmission. AI can use a lot of analytics to determine how complex target tasks are performed. In other words, AI can increase efficiency and reduce processing delays. Time-consuming tasks such as handover, network selection, and resource scheduling can be performed instantly using AI. AI can also play a significant role in M2M, machine-to-human, and human-to-machine communications. AI can also be a rapid communication in Brain Computer Interface (BCI). AI-based communication systems can be supported by metamaterials, intelligent structures, intelligent networks, intelligent devices, intelligent cognitive radios, self-sustaining wireless networks, and machine learning.

- THz 통신(terahertz communication): 데이터 전송률은 대역폭을 늘려 높일 수 있다. 이것은 넓은 대역폭으로 sub-THz 통신을 사용하고, 진보된 대규모 MIMO 기술을 적용하여 수행될 수 있다. 밀리미터 이하의 방사선으로도 알려진 THz파는 일반적으로 0.03mm-3mm 범위의 해당 파장을 가진 0.1THz와 10THz 사이의 주파수 대역을 나타낸다. 100GHz-300GHz 대역 범위(Sub THz 대역)는 셀룰러 통신을 위한 THz 대역의 주요 부분으로 간주된다. Sub-THz 대역을 mmWave 대역에 추가하면 6G 셀룰러 통신 용량은 늘어난다. 정의된 THz 대역 중 300GHz-3THz는 원적외선 (IR) 주파수 대역에 있다. 300GHz-3THz 대역은 광 대역의 일부이지만 광 대역의 경계에 있으며, RF 대역 바로 뒤에 있다. 따라서, 이 300 GHz-3 THz 대역은 RF와 유사성을 나타낸다. - THz communication (terahertz communication): The data rate can be increased by increasing the bandwidth. This can be done by using sub-THz communication with wide bandwidth and applying advanced massive MIMO technology. THz waves, also known as sub-millimeter waves, generally refer to the frequency band between 0.1 THz and 10 THz with corresponding wavelengths ranging from 0.03 mm to 3 mm. The 100 GHz–300 GHz band range (Sub THz band) is considered to be the main part of the THz band for cellular communications. Adding the Sub THz band to the mmWave band will increase the capacity of 6G cellular communications. Of the defined THz bands, 300 GHz–3 THz is in the far infrared (IR) frequency band. The 300 GHz–3 THz band is part of the optical band but is at the boundary of the optical band, just behind the RF band. Therefore, this 300 GHz–3 THz band shows similarities with RF.

도 7는 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따른, 전자기 스펙트럼을 나타낸다. 도 7의 실시 예는 본 개시의 다양한 실시 예와 결합될 수 있다. THz 통신의 주요 특성은 (i) 매우 높은 데이터 전송률을 지원하기 위해 광범위하게 사용 가능한 대역폭, (ii) 고주파에서 발생하는 높은 경로 손실 (고 지향성 안테나는 필수 불가결)을 포함한다. 높은 지향성 안테나에서 생성된 좁은 빔 폭은 간섭을 줄인다. THz 신호의 작은 파장은 훨씬 더 많은 수의 안테나 소자가 이 대역에서 동작하는 장치 및 BS에 통합될 수 있게 한다. 이를 통해 범위 제한을 극복할 수 있는 고급 적응형 배열 기술을 사용할 수 있다.FIG. 7 illustrates an electromagnetic spectrum according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The embodiment of FIG. 7 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure. Key characteristics of THz communications include (i) widely available bandwidth to support very high data rates, and (ii) high path loss at high frequencies (highly directional antennas are indispensable). The narrow beam width generated by the highly directional antenna reduces interference. The small wavelength of THz signals allows a much larger number of antenna elements to be integrated into devices and BSs operating in this band. This enables the use of advanced adaptive array techniques to overcome range limitations.

- 대규모 MIMO 기술(large-scale MIMO)- Large-scale MIMO technology

- 홀로그램 빔 포밍(hologram beamforming, HBF)- Hologram beamforming (HBF)

- 광 무선 기술(optical wireless technology)- Optical wireless technology

- 자유공간 광전송 백홀 네트워크(FSO backhaul network)- Free space optical transmission backhaul network (FSO backhaul network)

- 양자 통신(quantum communication)- Quantum communication

- 셀-프리 통신(cell-free communication)- Cell-free communication

- 무선 정보 및 에너지 전송 통합(integration of wireless information and power transmission)- Integration of wireless information and power transmission

- 센싱과 커뮤니케이션의 통합(integration of wireless communication and sensing)- Integration of wireless communication and sensing

- 액세스 백홀 네트워크의 통합(integrated access and backhaul network)- Integrated access and backhaul network

- 빅 데이터 분석(big data analysis)- Big data analysis

- 재구성 가능한 지능형 메타표면(reconfigurable intelligent surface)- Reconfigurable intelligent surface

- 메타버스(metaverse)- metaverse

- 블록 체인(block-chain)- Block-chain

- 무인 항공기(unmanned aerial vehicle, UAV): UAV 또는 드론은 6G 무선 통신에서 중요한 요소가 될 것이다. 대부분의 경우, UAV 기술을 사용하여 고속 데이터 무선 연결이 제공될 수 있다. BS(base station) 엔티티는 셀룰러 연결을 제공하기 위해 UAV에 설치될 수 있다. UAV는 쉬운 배치, 강력한 가시선 링크 및 이동성이 제어되는 자유도와 같은 고정 BS 인프라에서 볼 수 없는 특정 기능을 가지고 있을 수 있다. 천재 지변 등의 긴급 상황 동안, 지상 통신 인프라의 배치는 경제적으로 실현 가능하지 않으며, 때로는 휘발성 환경에서 서비스를 제공할 수 없다. UAV는 이러한 상황을 쉽게 처리할 수 있다. UAV는 무선 통신 분야의 새로운 패러다임이 될 것이다. 이 기술은 eMBB, URLLC 및 mMTC 인 무선 네트워크의 세 가지 기본 요구 사항을 용이하게 한다. UAV는 또한, 네트워크 연결성 향상, 화재 감지, 재난 응급 서비스, 보안 및 감시, 오염 모니터링, 주차 모니터링, 사고 모니터링 등과 같은 여러 가지 목적을 지원할 수 있다. 따라서, UAV 기술은 6G 통신에 가장 중요한 기술 중 하나로 인식되고 있다.- Unmanned aerial vehicles (UAV): UAVs or drones will be a crucial element in 6G wireless communications. In most cases, high-speed data wireless connectivity can be provided using UAV technology. The base station (BS) entity can be installed on the UAV to provide cellular connectivity. UAVs may have certain features not found in fixed BS infrastructure such as easy deployment, robust line-of-sight links, and freedom of movement with controlled mobility. During emergency situations such as natural disasters, deployment of terrestrial communication infrastructure is not economically feasible and sometimes cannot provide services in volatile environments. UAVs can easily handle such situations. UAVs will be a new paradigm in wireless communications. This technology facilitates three basic requirements of wireless networks namely eMBB, URLLC, and mMTC. UAVs can also support several purposes such as enhancing network connectivity, fire detection, disaster emergency services, security and surveillance, pollution monitoring, parking monitoring, and accident monitoring. Therefore, UAV technology is recognized as one of the most important technologies for 6G communications.

- 자율주행(autonomous driving, self-driving): 자율 주행 인프라 구축의 핵심 요소인 V2X(vehicle to everything)는 차량과 차량 간 무선 통신(vehicle to vehicle, V2V), 차량과 인프라 간 무선 통신(vehicle to infrastructure, V2I) 등 자동차가 자율 주행을 하기 위해 도로에 있는 다양한 요소와 소통하고 공유하는 기술일 수 있다. 자율 주행의 성능을 극대화하고 높은 안전성을 확보하기 위해서는 빠른 전송속도와 저지연 기술이 반드시 필요하다. 더하여, 앞으로 자율주행은 운전자에게 경고나 안내 메시지를 전달하는 수준을 넘어 적극적으로 차량 운행에 개입하고 위험 상황에서 직접 차량을 제어해야 할 수 있다. 이를 위해서, 송수신해야 할 정보의 양이 방대해질 수 있으므로, 6G에서는 5G보다 빠른 전송 속도와 저지연으로 자율주행을 극대화할 수 있을 것으로 예상된다.- Autonomous driving (self-driving): V2X (vehicle to everything), a key element of building autonomous driving infrastructure, can be a technology that allows cars to communicate and share with various elements on the road for autonomous driving, such as vehicle to vehicle (V2V) wireless communication and vehicle to infrastructure (V2I) wireless communication. In order to maximize the performance of autonomous driving and ensure high safety, fast transmission speed and low-latency technology are essential. In addition, in the future, autonomous driving may need to go beyond the level of delivering warnings or guidance messages to drivers and actively intervene in vehicle operation and directly control the vehicle in dangerous situations. To this end, the amount of information that needs to be transmitted and received may become enormous, so 6G is expected to maximize autonomous driving with faster transmission speeds and lower latency than 5G.

도 8는 SL 통신을 위한 무선 프로토콜 구조(radio protocol architecture)를 나타낸다. 구체적으로, 도 8의 (a)는 NR의 사용자 평면 프로토콜 스택을 나타내고, 도 8의 (b)는 NR의 제어 평면 프로토콜 스택을 나타낸다.Fig. 8 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication. Specifically, Fig. 8 (a) shows a user plane protocol stack of NR, and Fig. 8 (b) shows a control plane protocol stack of NR.

이하, SL 동기 신호(Sidelink Synchronization Signal, SLSS) 및 동기화 정보에 대해 설명한다.Below, the SL synchronization signal (Sidelink Synchronization Signal, SLSS) and synchronization information are described.

SLSS는 SL 특정적인 시퀀스(sequence)로, PSSS(Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal)와 SSSS(Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal)를 포함할 수 있다. 상기 PSSS는 S-PSS(Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal)라고 칭할 수 있고, 상기 SSSS는 S-SSS(Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal)라고 칭할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 길이-127 M-시퀀스(length-127 M-sequences)가 S-PSS에 대하여 사용될 수 있고, 길이-127 골드-시퀀스(length-127 Gold sequences)가 S-SSS에 대하여 사용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 S-PSS를 이용하여 최초 신호를 검출(signal detection)할 수 있고, 동기를 획득할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 S-PSS 및 S-SSS를 이용하여 세부 동기를 획득할 수 있고, 동기 신호 ID를 검출할 수 있다.SLSS is an SL-specific sequence and may include a Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal (PSSS) and a Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal (SSSS). The PSSS may be referred to as a Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal (S-PSS), and the SSSS may be referred to as a Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal (S-SSS). For example, length-127 M-sequences may be used for the S-PSS, and length-127 Gold sequences may be used for the S-SSS. For example, a terminal may detect an initial signal (signal detection) and acquire synchronization using the S-PSS. For example, the terminal may acquire detailed synchronization and detect a synchronization signal ID using the S-PSS and the S-SSS.

PSBCH(Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel)는 SL 신호 송수신 전에 단말이 가장 먼저 알아야 하는 기본이 되는 (시스템) 정보가 전송되는 (방송) 채널일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 기본이 되는 정보는 SLSS에 관련된 정보, 듀플렉스 모드(Duplex Mode, DM), TDD UL/DL(Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) 구성, 리소스 풀 관련 정보, SLSS에 관련된 어플리케이션의 종류, 서브프레임 오프셋, 방송 정보 등일 수 있다. 예를 들어, PSBCH 성능의 평가를 위해, NR V2X에서, PSBCH의 페이로드 크기는 24 비트의 CRC를 포함하여 56 비트일 수 있다.PSBCH (Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel) may be a (broadcast) channel through which basic (system) information that a terminal must know first before transmitting and receiving an SL signal is transmitted. For example, the basic information may be information related to SLSS, duplex mode (DM), TDD UL/DL (Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) configuration, resource pool related information, type of application related to SLSS, subframe offset, broadcast information, etc. For example, in order to evaluate PSBCH performance, in NR V2X, the payload size of PSBCH may be 56 bits including a 24-bit CRC.

S-PSS, S-SSS 및 PSBCH는 주기적 전송을 지원하는 블록 포맷(예를 들어, SL SS(Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH 블록, 이하 S-SSB(Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block))에 포함될 수 있다. 상기 S-SSB는 캐리어 내의 PSCCH(Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH(Physical Sidelink Shared Channel)와 동일한 뉴머놀로지(즉, SCS 및 CP 길이)를 가질 수 있고, 전송 대역폭은 (미리) 설정된 SL BWP(Sidelink BWP) 내에 있을 수 있다. 예를 들어, S-SSB의 대역폭은 11 RB(Resource Block)일 수 있다. 예를 들어, PSBCH는 11 RB에 걸쳐있을 수 있다. 그리고, S-SSB의 주파수 위치는 (미리) 설정될 수 있다. 따라서, 단말은 캐리어에서 S-SSB를 발견하기 위해 주파수에서 가설 검출(hypothesis detection)을 수행할 필요가 없다. S-PSS, S-SSS and PSBCH may be included in a block format supporting periodic transmission (e.g., SL SS (Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH block, hereinafter referred to as S-SSB (Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block)). The S-SSB may have the same numerology (i.e., SCS and CP length) as the PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) in a carrier, and a transmission bandwidth may be within a (pre-)configured SL BWP (Sidelink BWP). For example, the bandwidth of the S-SSB may be 11 RB (Resource Block). For example, the PSBCH may span 11 RBs. And, the frequency location of the S-SSB may be (pre-)configured. Therefore, the terminal does not need to perform hypothesis detection in frequency to discover the S-SSB in the carrier.

한편, NR SL 시스템에서, 서로 다른 SCS 및/또는 CP 길이를 가지는 복수의 뉴머놀로지가 지원될 수 있다. 이 때, SCS가 증가함에 따라서, 전송 단말이 S-SSB를 전송하는 시간 자원의 길이가 짧아질 수 있다. 이에 따라, S-SSB의 커버리지(coverage)가 감소할 수 있다. 따라서, S-SSB의 커버리지를 보장하기 위하여, 전송 단말은 SCS에 따라 하나의 S-SSB 전송 주기 내에서 하나 이상의 S-SSB를 수신 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 전송 단말이 하나의 S-SSB 전송 주기 내에서 수신 단말에게 전송하는 S-SSB의 개수는 전송 단말에게 사전에 설정되거나(pre-configured), 설정(configured)될 수 있다. 예를 들어, S-SSB 전송 주기는 160ms 일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 모든 SCS에 대하여, 160ms의 S-SSB 전송 주기가 지원될 수 있다. Meanwhile, in the NR SL system, multiple numerologies having different SCS and/or CP lengths may be supported. In this case, as the SCS increases, the length of the time resource for a transmitting terminal to transmit an S-SSB may become shorter. Accordingly, the coverage of the S-SSB may decrease. Therefore, in order to ensure the coverage of the S-SSB, the transmitting terminal may transmit one or more S-SSBs to a receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period according to the SCS. For example, the number of S-SSBs that the transmitting terminal transmits to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period may be pre-configured or configured for the transmitting terminal. For example, the S-SSB transmission period may be 160 ms. For example, an S-SSB transmission period of 160 ms may be supported for all SCSs.

예를 들어, SCS가 FR1에서 15kHz인 경우, 전송 단말은 하나의 S-SSB 전송 주기 내에서 수신 단말에게 1개 또는 2개의 S-SSB를 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, SCS가 FR1에서 30kHz인 경우, 전송 단말은 하나의 S-SSB 전송 주기 내에서 수신 단말에게 1개 또는 2개의 S-SSB를 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, SCS가 FR1에서 60kHz인 경우, 전송 단말은 하나의 S-SSB 전송 주기 내에서 수신 단말에게 1개, 2개 또는 4개의 S-SSB를 전송할 수 있다.For example, when the SCS is 15 kHz at FR1, the transmitting terminal can transmit one or two S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period. For example, when the SCS is 30 kHz at FR1, the transmitting terminal can transmit one or two S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period. For example, when the SCS is 60 kHz at FR1, the transmitting terminal can transmit one, two, or four S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.

예를 들어, SCS가 FR2에서 60kHz인 경우, 전송 단말은 하나의 S-SSB 전송 주기 내에서 수신 단말에게 1개, 2개, 4개, 8개, 16개 또는 32개의 S-SSB를 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, SCS가 FR2에서 120kHz인 경우, 전송 단말은 하나의 S-SSB 전송 주기 내에서 수신 단말에게 1개, 2개, 4개, 8개, 16개, 32개 또는 64개의 S-SSB를 전송할 수 있다.For example, when the SCS is 60 kHz at FR2, the transmitting terminal can transmit 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period. For example, when the SCS is 120 kHz at FR2, the transmitting terminal can transmit 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.

한편, SCS가 60kHz인 경우, 두 가지 타입의 CP가 지원될 수 있다. 또한, CP 타입에 따라서 전송 단말이 수신 단말에게 전송하는 S-SSB의 구조가 상이할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 CP 타입은 Normal CP(NCP) 또는 Extended CP(ECP)일 수 있다. 구체적으로, 예를 들어, CP 타입이 NCP인 경우, 전송 단말이 전송하는 S-SSB 내에서 PSBCH를 맵핑하는 심볼의 개수는 9 개 또는 8 개일 수 있다. 반면, 예를 들어, CP 타입이 ECP인 경우, 전송 단말이 전송하는 S-SSB 내에서 PSBCH를 맵핑하는 심볼의 개수는 7 개 또는 6 개일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 전송 단말이 전송하는 S-SSB 내의 첫 번째 심볼에는, PSBCH가 맵핑될 수 있다. 예를 들어, S-SSB를 수신하는 수신 단말은 S-SSB의 첫 번째 심볼 구간에서 AGC(Automatic Gain Control) 동작을 수행할 수 있다.Meanwhile, when SCS is 60 kHz, two types of CP can be supported. In addition, the structure of the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal to the receiving terminal may be different depending on the CP type. For example, the CP type may be Normal CP (NCP) or Extended CP (ECP). Specifically, for example, when the CP type is NCP, the number of symbols to which the PSBCH is mapped in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal may be 9 or 8. On the other hand, for example, when the CP type is ECP, the number of symbols to which the PSBCH is mapped in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal may be 7 or 6. For example, the PSBCH may be mapped to the first symbol in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal. For example, the receiving terminal receiving the S-SSB may perform an AGC (Automatic Gain Control) operation in the first symbol section of the S-SSB.

도 9는 V2X 또는 SL 통신을 수행하는 단말을 나타낸다.Figure 9 shows a terminal performing V2X or SL communication.

도 9를 참조하면, V2X 또는 SL 통신에서 단말이라는 용어는 주로 사용자의 단말을 의미할 수 있다. 하지만, 기지국과 같은 네트워크 장비가 단말 사이의 통신 방식에 따라 신호를 송수신하는 경우, 기지국 또한 일종의 단말로 간주될 수도 있다. 예를 들어, 단말 1은 제 1 장치(100)일 수 있고, 단말 2 는 제 2 장치(200)일 수 있다. Referring to Fig. 9, the term terminal in V2X or SL communication may mainly mean a user's terminal. However, if a network device such as a base station transmits and receives a signal according to a communication method between terminals, the base station may also be considered a type of terminal. For example, terminal 1 may be a first device (100), and terminal 2 may be a second device (200).

예를 들어, 단말 1은 일련의 자원의 집합을 의미하는 리소스 풀(resource pool) 내에서 특정한 자원에 해당하는 자원 단위(resource unit)를 선택할 수 있다. 그리고, 단말 1은 상기 자원 단위를 사용하여 SL 신호를 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 수신 단말인 단말 2는 단말 1이 신호를 전송할 수 있는 리소스 풀을 설정 받을 수 있고, 상기 리소스 풀 내에서 단말 1의 신호를 검출할 수 있다.For example, terminal 1 can select a resource unit corresponding to a specific resource within a resource pool, which means a set of a series of resources. Then, terminal 1 can transmit an SL signal using the resource unit. For example, terminal 2, which is a receiving terminal, can be configured with a resource pool in which terminal 1 can transmit a signal, and can detect a signal of terminal 1 within the resource pool.

여기서, 단말 1이 기지국의 연결 범위 내에 있는 경우, 기지국이 리소스 풀을 단말 1에게 알려줄 수 있다. 반면, 단말 1이 기지국의 연결 범위 밖에 있는 경우, 다른 단말이 단말 1에게 리소스 풀을 알려주거나, 또는 단말 1은 사전에 설정된 리소스 풀을 사용할 수 있다.Here, if terminal 1 is within the connection range of the base station, the base station can inform terminal 1 of the resource pool. On the other hand, if terminal 1 is outside the connection range of the base station, another terminal can inform terminal 1 of the resource pool, or terminal 1 can use a pre-configured resource pool.

일반적으로 리소스 풀은 복수의 자원 단위로 구성될 수 있고, 각 단말은 하나 또는 복수의 자원 단위를 선택하여 자신의 SL 신호 전송에 사용할 수 있다.In general, a resource pool can be composed of multiple resource units, and each terminal can select one or multiple resource units to use for its SL signal transmission.

도 10는 V2X 또는 SL 통신을 위한 자원 단위를 나타낸다.Figure 10 shows resource units for V2X or SL communication.

도 10를 참조하면, 리소스 풀의 전체 주파수 자원이 NF개로 분할될 수 있고, 리소스 풀의 전체 시간 자원이 NT개로 분할될 수 있다. 따라서, 총 NF * NT 개의 자원 단위가 리소스 풀 내에서 정의될 수 있다. 도 13는 해당 리소스 풀이 NT 개의 서브프레임의 주기로 반복되는 경우의 예를 나타낸다.Referring to Fig. 10, the entire frequency resources of the resource pool can be divided into NF units, and the entire time resources of the resource pool can be divided into NT units. Accordingly, a total of NF * NT resource units can be defined within the resource pool. Fig. 13 shows an example in which the resource pool repeats with a period of NT subframes.

도 10에 나타난 바와 같이, 하나의 자원 단위(예를 들어, Unit #0)는 주기적으로 반복하여 나타날 수 있다. 또는, 시간 또는 주파수 차원에서의 다이버시티(diversity) 효과를 얻기 위해서, 하나의 논리적인 자원 단위가 맵핑되는 물리적 자원 단위의 인덱스가 시간에 따라 사전에 정해진 패턴으로 변화할 수도 있다. 이러한 자원 단위의 구조에 있어서, 리소스 풀이란 SL 신호를 전송하고자 하는 단말이 전송에 사용할 수 있는 자원 단위들의 집합을 의미할 수 있다. As shown in Fig. 10, one resource unit (e.g., Unit #0) may appear repeatedly periodically. Or, in order to obtain a diversity effect in the time or frequency dimension, the index of the physical resource unit to which one logical resource unit is mapped may change in a pre-determined pattern over time. In the structure of such resource units, a resource pool may mean a set of resource units that a terminal that wishes to transmit an SL signal can use for transmission.

리소스 풀은 여러 종류로 세분화될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 각 리소스 풀에서 전송되는 SL 신호의 컨텐츠(content)에 따라, 리소스 풀은 아래와 같이 구분될 수 있다. Resource pools can be subdivided into several types. For example, depending on the content of the SL signal transmitted from each resource pool, resource pools can be divided as follows.

(1) 스케쥴링 할당(Scheduling Assignment, SA)은 전송 단말이 SL 데이터 채널의 전송으로 사용하는 자원의 위치, 그 외 데이터 채널의 복조를 위해서 필요한 MCS(Modulation and Coding Scheme) 또는 MIMO(Multiple Input Multiple Output) 전송 방식, TA(Timing Advance)등의 정보를 포함하는 신호일 수 있다. SA는 동일 자원 단위 상에서 SL 데이터와 함께 멀티플렉싱되어 전송되는 것도 가능하며, 이 경우 SA 리소스 풀이란 SA가 SL 데이터와 멀티플렉싱되어 전송되는 리소스 풀을 의미할 수 있다. SA는 SL 제어 채널(control channel)로 불릴 수도 있다. (1) Scheduling Assignment (SA) may be a signal that includes information such as the location of resources used by a transmitting terminal for transmission of an SL data channel, MCS (Modulation and Coding Scheme) or MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) transmission method required for demodulation of other data channels, and TA (Timing Advance). SA may also be transmitted multiplexed with SL data on the same resource unit, and in this case, the SA resource pool may mean a resource pool in which SA is multiplexed with SL data and transmitted. SA may also be called an SL control channel.

(2) SL 데이터 채널(Physical Sidelink Shared Channel, PSSCH)은 전송 단말이 사용자 데이터를 전송하는데 사용하는 리소스 풀일 수 있다. 만약 동일 자원 단위 상에서 SL 데이터와 함께 SA가 멀티플렉싱되어 전송되는 경우, SA 정보를 제외한 형태의 SL 데이터 채널만이 SL 데이터 채널을 위한 리소스 풀에서 전송될 수 있다. 다시 말해, SA 리소스 풀 내의 개별 자원 단위 상에서 SA 정보를 전송하는데 사용되었던 REs(Resource Elements)는 SL 데이터 채널의 리소스 풀에서 여전히 SL 데이터를 전송하기 위해 사용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 전송 단말은 연속적인 PRB에 PSSCH를 맵핑시켜서 전송할 수 있다.(2) SL data channel (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel, PSSCH) may be a resource pool used by a transmitting terminal to transmit user data. If SA is multiplexed and transmitted together with SL data on the same resource unit, only SL data channels excluding SA information may be transmitted in the resource pool for the SL data channel. In other words, REs (Resource Elements) used to transmit SA information on individual resource units within the SA resource pool may still be used to transmit SL data in the resource pool of the SL data channel. For example, a transmitting terminal may transmit PSSCH by mapping it to consecutive PRBs.

(3) 디스커버리 채널은 전송 단말이 자신의 ID 등의 정보를 전송하기 위한 리소스 풀일 수 있다. 이를 통해, 전송 단말은 인접 단말이 자신을 발견하도록 할 수 있다.(3) The discovery channel may be a resource pool for transmitting terminals to transmit information such as their IDs. Through this, the transmitting terminals can enable adjacent terminals to discover themselves.

이상에서 설명한 SL 신호의 컨텐츠가 동일한 경우에도, SL 신호의 송수신 속성에 따라서 상이한 리소스 풀을 사용할 수 있다. 일 예로, 동일한 SL 데이터 채널이나 디스커버리 메시지라 하더라도, SL 신호의 전송 타이밍 결정 방식(예를 들어, 동기 기준 신호의 수신 시점에서 전송되는지 아니면 상기 수신 시점에서 일정한 타이밍 어드밴스를 적용하여 전송되는지), 자원 할당 방식(예를 들어, 개별 신호의 전송 자원을 기지국이 개별 전송 단말에게 지정해주는지 아니면 개별 전송 단말이 리소스 풀 내에서 자체적으로 개별 신호 전송 자원을 선택하는지), 신호 포맷(예를 들어, 각 SL 신호가 한 서브프레임에서 차지하는 심볼의 개수, 또는 하나의 SL 신호의 전송에 사용되는 서브프레임의 개수), 기지국으로부터의 신호 세기, SL 단말의 송신 전력 세기 등에 따라서 다시 상이한 리소스 풀로 구분될 수도 있다.Even when the content of the SL signal described above is the same, different resource pools may be used depending on the transmission/reception properties of the SL signal. For example, even when it is the same SL data channel or discovery message, it may be again divided into different resource pools depending on the transmission timing determination method of the SL signal (for example, whether it is transmitted at the time of reception of a synchronization reference signal or whether it is transmitted by applying a certain timing advance at the time of reception), the resource allocation method (for example, whether the base station designates transmission resources of individual signals to individual transmitting terminals or whether individual transmitting terminals select individual signal transmission resources on their own within the resource pool), the signal format (for example, the number of symbols that each SL signal occupies in one subframe or the number of subframes used for transmission of one SL signal), the signal strength from the base station, the transmission power strength of the SL terminal, etc.

도 11은 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따른, BWP의 일 예를 나타낸다. 도 11의 실시 예는 본 개시의 다양한 실시 예와 결합될 수 있다. 도 11의 실시 예에서, BWP는 세 개라고 가정한다.FIG. 11 illustrates an example of a BWP according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The embodiment of FIG. 11 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure. In the embodiment of FIG. 11, it is assumed that there are three BWPs.

도 11을 참조하면, CRB(common resource block)는 캐리어 밴드의 한 쪽 끝에서부터 다른 쪽 끝까지 번호가 매겨진 캐리어 자원 블록일 수 있다. 그리고, PRB는 각 BWP 내에서 번호가 매겨진 자원 블록일 수 있다. 포인트 A는 자원 블록 그리드(resource block grid)에 대한 공통 참조 포인트(common reference point)를 지시할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 11, a common resource block (CRB) may be a carrier resource block numbered from one end of a carrier band to the other end. And, a PRB may be a numbered resource block within each BWP. Point A may indicate a common reference point for a resource block grid.

BWP는 포인트 A, 포인트 A로부터의 오프셋(NstartBWP) 및 대역폭(NsizeBWP)에 의해 설정될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 포인트 A는 모든 뉴머놀로지(예를 들어, 해당 캐리어에서 네트워크에 의해 지원되는 모든 뉴머놀로지)의 서브캐리어 0이 정렬되는 캐리어의 PRB의 외부 참조 포인트일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 오프셋은 주어진 뉴머놀로지에서 가장 낮은 서브캐리어와 포인트 A 사이의 PRB 간격일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 대역폭은 주어진 뉴머놀로지에서 PRB의 개수일 수 있다.The BWP can be set by a point A, an offset from point A (NstartBWP) and a bandwidth (NsizeBWP). For example, point A can be an outer reference point of PRBs of a carrier where subcarrier 0 of all nucleos (e.g., all nucleosides supported by the network on that carrier) is aligned. For example, the offset can be the PRB spacing between the lowest subcarrier in a given nucleometry and point A. For example, the bandwidth can be the number of PRBs in a given nucleometry.

SLSS(Sidelink Synchronization Signal)는 SL(sidelink) 특정적인 시퀀스(sequence)로, PSSS(Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal)와 SSSS(Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal)를 포함할 수 있다. 상기 PSSS는 S-PSS(Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal)라고 칭할 수 있고, 상기 SSSS는 S-SSS(Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal)라고 칭할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 길이-127 M-시퀀스(length-127 M-sequences)가 S-PSS에 대하여 사용될 수 있고, 길이-127 골드-시퀀스(length-127 Gold sequences)가 S-SSS에 대하여 사용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 S-PSS를 이용하여 최초 신호를 검출(signal detection)할 수 있고, 동기를 획득할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 S-PSS 및 S-SSS를 이용하여 세부 동기를 획득할 수 있고, 동기 신호 ID를 검출할 수 있다.SLSS (Sidelink Synchronization Signal) is a SL (sidelink) specific sequence and may include PSSS (Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal) and SSSS (Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal). The PSSS may be referred to as S-PSS (Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal) and the SSSS may be referred to as S-SSS (Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal). For example, length-127 M-sequences may be used for S-PSS and length-127 Gold sequences may be used for S-SSS. For example, a terminal may detect an initial signal (signal detection) and obtain synchronization using S-PSS. For example, the terminal can obtain detailed synchronization using S-PSS and S-SSS and detect a synchronization signal ID.

PSBCH(Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel)는 SL 신호 송수신 전에 단말이 가장 먼저 알아야 하는 기본이 되는 (시스템) 정보가 전송되는 (방송) 채널일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 기본이 되는 정보는 SLSS에 관련된 정보, 듀플렉스 모드(Duplex Mode, DM), TDD UL/DL(Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) 구성, 리소스 풀 관련 정보, SLSS에 관련된 애플리케이션의 종류, 서브프레임 오프셋, 방송 정보 등일 수 있다. 예를 들어, PSBCH 성능의 평가를 위해, NR V2X에서, PSBCH의 페이로드 크기는 24 비트의 CRC(Cyclic Redundancy Check)를 포함하여 56 비트일 수 있다.PSBCH (Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel) may be a (broadcast) channel through which basic (system) information that a terminal must know first before transmitting and receiving an SL signal is transmitted. For example, the basic information may be information related to SLSS, duplex mode (DM), TDD UL/DL (Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) configuration, resource pool related information, type of application related to SLSS, subframe offset, broadcast information, etc. For example, in order to evaluate PSBCH performance, in NR V2X, the payload size of PSBCH may be 56 bits including a 24-bit CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check).

S-PSS, S-SSS 및 PSBCH는 주기적 전송을 지원하는 블록 포맷(예를 들어, SL SS(Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH 블록, 이하 S-SSB(Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block))에 포함될 수 있다. 상기 S-SSB는 캐리어 내의 PSCCH(Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH(Physical Sidelink Shared Channel)와 동일한 뉴머놀로지(즉, SCS 및 CP 길이)를 가질 수 있고, 전송 대역폭은 (미리) 설정된 SL BWP(Sidelink BWP) 내에 있을 수 있다. 예를 들어, S-SSB의 대역폭은 11 RB(Resource Block)일 수 있다. 예를 들어, PSBCH는 11 RB에 걸쳐있을 수 있다. 그리고, S-SSB의 주파수 위치는 (미리) 설정될 수 있다. 따라서, 단말은 캐리어에서 S-SSB를 발견하기 위해 주파수에서 가설 검출(hypothesis detection)을 수행할 필요가 없다.S-PSS, S-SSS and PSBCH may be included in a block format supporting periodic transmission (e.g., SL SS (Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH block, hereinafter referred to as S-SSB (Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block)). The S-SSB may have the same numerology (i.e., SCS and CP length) as the PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) in a carrier, and a transmission bandwidth may be within a (pre-)configured SL BWP (Sidelink BWP). For example, the bandwidth of the S-SSB may be 11 RB (Resource Block). For example, the PSBCH may span 11 RBs. And, the frequency location of the S-SSB may be (pre-)configured. Therefore, the terminal does not need to perform hypothesis detection in frequency to discover the S-SSB in the carrier.

도 12는 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따라, 단말이 자원 할당 모드에 따라 V2X 또는 SL 통신을 수행하는 절차를 나타낸다. 도 12의 실시 예는 본 개시의 다양한 실시 예와 결합될 수 있다.FIG. 12 illustrates a procedure for a terminal to perform V2X or SL communication according to a resource allocation mode according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The embodiment of FIG. 12 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

도 12의 (a)를 참조하면, 자원 할당 모드 1에서, 기지국은 SL 전송을 위해 단말에 의해 사용될 SL 자원을 스케줄링할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단계 S1200에서, 기지국은 제 1 단말에게 SL 자원과 관련된 정보 및/또는 UL 자원과 관련된 정보를 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 UL 자원은 PUCCH 자원 및/또는 PUSCH 자원을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 UL 자원은 SL HARQ 피드백을 기지국에게 보고하기 위한 자원일 수 있다.Referring to (a) of FIG. 12, in resource allocation mode 1, the base station can schedule SL resources to be used by the terminal for SL transmission. For example, in step S1200, the base station can transmit information related to SL resources and/or information related to UL resources to the first terminal. For example, the UL resources can include PUCCH resources and/or PUSCH resources. For example, the UL resources can be resources for reporting SL HARQ feedback to the base station.

예를 들어, 제 1 단말은 DG(dynamic grant) 자원과 관련된 정보 및/또는 CG(configured grant) 자원과 관련된 정보를 기지국으로부터 수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, CG 자원은 CG 타입 1 자원 또는 CG 타입 2 자원을 포함할 수 있다. 본 명세서에서, DG 자원은, 기지국이 DCI(downlink control information)를 통해서 제 1 단말에게 설정/할당하는 자원일 수 있다. 본 명세서에서, CG 자원은, 기지국이 DCI 및/또는 RRC 메시지를 통해서 제 1 단말에게 설정/할당하는 (주기적인) 자원일 수 있다. 예를 들어, CG 타입 1 자원의 경우, 기지국은 CG 자원과 관련된 정보를 포함하는 RRC 메시지를 제 1 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, CG 타입 2 자원의 경우, 기지국은 CG 자원과 관련된 정보를 포함하는 RRC 메시지를 제 1 단말에게 전송할 수 있고, 기지국은 CG 자원의 활성화(activation) 또는 해제(release)와 관련된 DCI를 제 1 단말에게 전송할 수 있다.For example, the first terminal may receive information related to a DG (dynamic grant) resource and/or information related to a CG (configured grant) resource from the base station. For example, the CG resource may include a CG type 1 resource or a CG type 2 resource. In this specification, the DG resource may be a resource that the base station configures/allocates to the first terminal via DCI (downlink control information). In this specification, the CG resource may be a (periodic) resource that the base station configures/allocates to the first terminal via DCI and/or an RRC message. For example, in case of a CG type 1 resource, the base station may transmit an RRC message including information related to the CG resource to the first terminal. For example, in case of a CG type 2 resource, the base station may transmit an RRC message including information related to the CG resource to the first terminal, and the base station may transmit DCI related to activation or release of the CG resource to the first terminal.

단계 S1510에서, 제 1 단말은 상기 자원 스케줄링을 기반으로 PSCCH(예, SCI(Sidelink Control Information) 또는 1st-stage SCI)를 제 2 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 단계 S1220에서, 제 1 단말은 상기 PSCCH와 관련된 PSSCH(예, 2nd-stage SCI, MAC PDU, 데이터 등)를 제 2 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 단계 S1230에서, 제 1 단말은 PSCCH/PSSCH와 관련된 PSFCH를 제 2 단말로부터 수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, HARQ 피드백 정보(예, NACK 정보 또는 ACK 정보)가 상기 PSFCH를 통해서 상기 제 2 단말로부터 수신될 수 있다. 단계 S1240에서, 제 1 단말은 HARQ 피드백 정보를 PUCCH 또는 PUSCH를 통해서 기지국에게 전송/보고할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 기지국에게 보고되는 HARQ 피드백 정보는, 상기 제 1 단말이 상기 제 2 단말로부터 수신한 HARQ 피드백 정보를 기반으로 생성(generate)하는 정보일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 기지국에게 보고되는 HARQ 피드백 정보는, 상기 제 1 단말이 사전에 설정된 규칙을 기반으로 생성(generate)하는 정보일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 DCI는 SL의 스케줄링을 위한 DCI일 수 있다.In step S1510, the first terminal may transmit a PSCCH (e.g., Sidelink Control Information (SCI) or 1st-stage SCI) to the second terminal based on the resource scheduling. In step S1220, the first terminal may transmit a PSSCH (e.g., 2nd-stage SCI, MAC PDU, data, etc.) related to the PSCCH to the second terminal. In step S1230, the first terminal may receive a PSFCH related to the PSCCH/PSSCH from the second terminal. For example, HARQ feedback information (e.g., NACK information or ACK information) may be received from the second terminal via the PSFCH. In step S1240, the first terminal may transmit/report HARQ feedback information to the base station via a PUCCH or a PUSCH. For example, the HARQ feedback information reported to the base station may be information generated by the first terminal based on the HARQ feedback information received from the second terminal. For example, the HARQ feedback information reported to the base station may be information generated by the first terminal based on a rule set in advance. For example, the DCI may be DCI for scheduling of SL.

도 12의 (b)를 참조하면, 자원 할당 모드 2에서, 단말은 기지국/네트워크에 의해 설정된 SL 자원 또는 미리 설정된 SL 자원 내에서 SL 전송 자원을 결정할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 설정된 SL 자원 또는 미리 설정된 SL 자원은 자원 풀일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 자율적으로 SL 전송을 위한 자원을 선택 또는 스케줄링할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 설정된 자원 풀 내에서 자원을 스스로 선택하여, SL 통신을 수행할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 센싱(sensing) 및 자원 (재)선택 절차를 수행하여, 선택 윈도우 내에서 스스로 자원을 선택할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 센싱은 서브채널 단위로 수행될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단계 S1210에서, 자원 풀 내에서 자원을 스스로 선택한 제 1 단말은 상기 자원을 사용하여 PSCCH(예, SCI(Sidelink Control Information) 또는 1st-stage SCI)를 제 2 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 단계 S1220에서, 제 1 단말은 상기 PSCCH와 관련된 PSSCH(예, 2nd-stage SCI, MAC PDU, 데이터 등)를 제 2 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 단계 S1230에서, 제 1 단말은 PSCCH/PSSCH와 관련된 PSFCH를 제 2 단말로부터 수신할 수 있다. Referring to (b) of FIG. 12, in resource allocation mode 2, a terminal can determine an SL transmission resource within an SL resource set by a base station/network or a preset SL resource. For example, the set SL resource or the preset SL resource may be a resource pool. For example, the terminal can autonomously select or schedule resources for SL transmission. For example, the terminal can perform SL communication by selecting a resource by itself within the set resource pool. For example, the terminal can select a resource by itself within a selection window by performing sensing and resource (re)selection procedures. For example, the sensing can be performed on a subchannel basis. For example, in step S1210, a first terminal that has selected a resource by itself within a resource pool can transmit a PSCCH (e.g., SCI (Sidelink Control Information) or 1st-stage SCI) to a second terminal using the resource. In step S1220, the first terminal can transmit a PSSCH (e.g., 2nd-stage SCI, MAC PDU, data, etc.) related to the PSCCH to the second terminal. In step S1230, the first terminal can receive a PSFCH related to the PSCCH/PSSCH from the second terminal.

도 12의 (a) 또는 (b)를 참조하면, 예를 들어, 제 1 단말은 PSCCH 상에서 SCI를 제 2 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 또는, 예를 들어, 제 1 단말은 PSCCH 및/또는 PSSCH 상에서 두 개의 연속적인 SCI(예, 2-stage SCI)를 제 2 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 이 경우, 제 2 단말은 PSSCH를 제 1 단말로부터 수신하기 위해 두 개의 연속적인 SCI(예, 2-stage SCI)를 디코딩할 수 있다. 본 명세서에서, PSCCH 상에서 전송되는 SCI는 1st SCI, 제 1 SCI, 1st-stage SCI 또는 1st-stage SCI 포맷이라고 칭할 수 있고, PSSCH 상에서 전송되는 SCI는 2nd SCI, 제 2 SCI, 2nd-stage SCI 또는 2nd-stage SCI 포맷이라고 칭할 수 있다.Referring to (a) or (b) of FIG. 12, for example, the first terminal may transmit an SCI to the second terminal on the PSCCH. Or, for example, the first terminal may transmit two consecutive SCIs (e.g., 2-stage SCIs) to the second terminal on the PSCCH and/or the PSSCH. In this case, the second terminal may decode the two consecutive SCIs (e.g., 2-stage SCIs) to receive the PSSCH from the first terminal. In this specification, the SCI transmitted on the PSCCH may be referred to as a 1st SCI, a 1st SCI, a 1st-stage SCI, or a 1st-stage SCI format, and the SCI transmitted on the PSSCH may be referred to as a 2nd SCI, a 2nd SCI, a 2nd-stage SCI, or a 2nd-stage SCI format.

도 12의 (a) 또는 (b)를 참조하면, 단계 S1530에서, 제 1 단말은 PSFCH를 수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제 1 단말 및 제 2 단말은 PSFCH 자원을 결정할 수 있고, 제 2 단말은 PSFCH 자원을 사용하여 HARQ 피드백을 제 1 단말에게 전송할 수 있다.Referring to (a) or (b) of FIG. 12, in step S1530, the first terminal can receive the PSFCH. For example, the first terminal and the second terminal can determine the PSFCH resource, and the second terminal can transmit the HARQ feedback to the first terminal using the PSFCH resource.

도 12의 (a)를 참조하면, 단계 S1540에서, 제 1 단말은 PUCCH 및/또는 PUSCH를 통해서 SL HARQ 피드백을 기지국에게 전송할 수 있다.Referring to (a) of FIG. 12, in step S1540, the first terminal may transmit SL HARQ feedback to the base station through PUCCH and/or PUSCH.

한편, 상술한 사이드링크는 단말 간 통신 또는 단말 간 직접 통신으로 정의될 수 있다. 이 경우, PSCCH는 단말 간 직접 통신을 위한 물리 제어 채널, PSSCH는 단말 간 직접 통신을 위한 물리 데이터 채널 또는 물리 공유 채널, PSFCH는 단말간 직접 통신을 위한 물리 피드백 전송 채널로 정의될 수 있다.Meanwhile, the above-mentioned side link may be defined as terminal-to-terminal communication or terminal-to-terminal direct communication. In this case, PSCCH may be defined as a physical control channel for terminal-to-terminal direct communication, PSSCH may be defined as a physical data channel or physical shared channel for terminal-to-terminal direct communication, and PSFCH may be defined as a physical feedback transmission channel for terminal-to-terminal direct communication.

도 13은 L2 U2N 릴레이 (UE-to-Network Relay)의 컨트롤 플레인 절차를 설명하기 위한 도면이다. Figure 13 is a diagram for explaining the control plane procedure of L2 U2N relay (UE-to-Network Relay).

Rel-16 NR V2X의 PC5-RRC 측면 PC5 유니캐스트 링크 설정 절차는, 리모트 UE가 릴레이 UE를 통해 네트워크와 Uu RRC 연결 (connection)을 수립하기 전에, 리모트 UE가 릴레이 UE사이에 L2 U2N 릴레이 (layer 2 UE-to-Network relaying)를 위해 보안 유니캐스트 링크 (secure unicast link)를 설정하는데 재사용될 수 있다. The PC5-RRC aspect PC5 unicast link establishment procedure of Rel-16 NR V2X can be reused to establish a secure unicast link for layer 2 UE-to-Network relaying (L2 U2N relay) between the remote UE and the relay UE before the remote UE establishes a Uu RRC connection with the network via the relay UE.

in-coverage 및 out-of-coverage 모두에 대해 리모트 UE가 gNB와의 연결 설정을 위한 첫 번째 RRC 메시지를 시작하면, 리모트 UE와 U2N 릴레이 UE 간의 전송을 위한 PC5 L2 구성은 표준에 정의된 RLC/MAC 구성에 기초할 수 있다. 리모트 UE의 Uu SRB1/SRB2 및 DRB의 수립은 L2 U2N 릴레이에 대한 레거시 Uu 구성 절차를 따른다. For both in-coverage and out-of-coverage, when the remote UE initiates the first RRC message to establish connection with the gNB, the PC5 L2 configuration for transmission between the remote UE and the U2N relay UE can be based on the RLC/MAC configuration defined in the standard. The establishment of Uu SRB1/SRB2 and DRB of the remote UE follows the legacy Uu configuration procedure for L2 U2N relay.

소정의 시나리오 (TS 38.300)은 하기의 표 5과 같이 L2 U2N 릴레이의 컨트롤 플레인 절차를 기술하고 있다.A given scenario (TS 38.300) describes the control plane procedures for L2 U2N relays as shown in Table 5 below.

The L2 U2N Remote UE needs to establish its own PDU sessions/DRBs with the network before user plane data transmission.
The NR sidelink PC5 unicast link establishment procedures can be used to setup a secure unicast link between L2 U2N Remote UE and L2 U2N Relay UE before L2 U2N Remote UE establishes a Uu RRC connection with the network via L2 U2N Relay UE.
The establishment of Uu SRB1/SRB2 and DRB of the L2 U2N Remote UE is subject to Uu configuration procedures for L2 UE-to-Network Relay.
The following high level connection establishment procedure in Figure 13 applies to a L2 U2N Relay and L2 U2N Remote UE:
-S1300, S1301: The L2 U2N Remote and L2 U2N Relay UE perform discovery procedure, and establish a PC5-RRC connection using the NR sidelink PC5 unicast link establishment procedure.
-S1302, S1303: The L2 U2N Remote UE sends the first RRC message (i.e., RRCSetupRequest) for its connection establishment with gNB via the L2 U2N Relay UE, using a specified PC5 Relay RLC channel configuration. The L2 U2N Relay UE sends the SidelinkUEInformationNR message to request for the dedicated configurations required to support the relay operation for the L2 U2N Remote UE. If the L2 U2N Relay UE is not in RRC_CONNECTED, it needs to do its own Uu RRC connection establishment upon reception of a message on the specified PC5 Relay RLC channel. After L2 U2N Relay UE's RRC connection establishment procedure and sending the SidelinkUEInformationNR message, gNB configures SRB0 relaying Uu Relay RLC channel to the U2N Relay UE. The gNB responds with an RRCSetup message to L2 U2N Remote UE. The RRCSetup message is sent to the L2 U2N Remote UE using SRB0 relaying Uu Relay RLC channel over Uu and a specified PC5 Relay RLC channel over PC5.
-S1304: The gNB and L2 U2N Relay UE perform relaying channel setup procedure over Uu. According to the configuration from gNB, the L2 U2N Relay/Remote UE establishes a PC5 Relay RLC channel for relaying of SRB1 towards the L2 U2N Remote/Relay UE over PC5.
-S1305: The RRCSetupComplete message is sent by the L2 U2N Remote UE to the gNB via the L2 U2N Relay UE using SRB1 relaying channel over PC5 and SRB1 relaying channel configured to the L2 U2N Relay UE over Uu. Then the L2 U2N Remote UE is as in RRC_CONNECTED with the gNB.
- S1306, S1307: The L2 U2N Remote UE and gNB establish security following the Uu security mode procedure and the security messages are forwarded through the L2 U2N Relay UE.
- S1308, S1309 and S1310: The gNB sends an RRCReconfiguration message to the L2 U2N Remote UE via the L2 U2N Relay UE, to setup the end-to-end SRB2/DRBs of the L2 U2N Remote UE. The L2 U2N Remote UE sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the gNB via the L2 U2N Relay UE as a response. In addition, the gNB may configure additional Uu Relay RLC channels between the gNB and L2 U2N Relay UE, and PC5 Relay RLC channels between L2 U2N Relay UE and L2 U2N Remote UE for the relaying traffic
The L2 U2N Remote UE needs to establish its own PDU sessions/DRBs with the network before user plane data transmission.
The NR sidelink PC5 unicast link establishment procedures can be used to setup a secure unicast link between L2 U2N Remote UE and L2 U2N Relay UE before L2 U2N Remote UE establishes a Uu RRC connection with the network via L2 U2N Relay UE.
The establishment of Uu SRB1/SRB2 and DRB of the L2 U2N Remote UE is subject to Uu configuration procedures for L2 UE-to-Network Relay.
The following high level connection establishment procedure in Figure 13 applies to a L2 U2N Relay and L2 U2N Remote UE:
-S1300, S1301: The L2 U2N Remote and L2 U2N Relay UE perform discovery procedure, and establish a PC5-RRC connection using the NR sidelink PC5 unicast link establishment procedure.
-S1302, S1303: The L2 U2N Remote UE sends the first RRC message (ie, RRCSetupRequest ) for its connection establishment with gNB via the L2 U2N Relay UE, using a specified PC5 Relay RLC channel configuration. The L2 U2N Relay UE sends the SidelinkUEInformationNR message to request for the dedicated configurations required to support the relay operation for the L2 U2N Remote UE. If the L2 U2N Relay UE is not in RRC_CONNECTED, it needs to do its own Uu RRC connection establishment upon reception of a message on the specified PC5 Relay RLC channel. After L2 U2N Relay UE's RRC connection establishment procedure and sending the SidelinkUEInformationNR message, gNB configures SRB0 relaying Uu Relay RLC channel to the U2N Relay UE. The gNB responds with an RRCSetup message to L2 U2N Remote UE. The RRCSetup message is sent to the L2 U2N Remote UE using SRB0 relaying Uu Relay RLC channel over Uu and a specified PC5 Relay RLC channel over PC5.
-S1304: The gNB and L2 U2N Relay UE perform relaying channel setup procedure over Uu. According to the configuration from gNB, the L2 U2N Relay/Remote UE establishes a PC5 Relay RLC channel for relaying of SRB1 towards the L2 U2N Remote/Relay UE over PC5.
-S1305: The RRCSetupComplete message is sent by the L2 U2N Remote UE to the gNB via the L2 U2N Relay UE using SRB1 relaying channel over PC5 and SRB1 relaying channel configured to the L2 U2N Relay UE over Uu. Then the L2 U2N Remote UE is as in RRC_CONNECTED with the gNB.
- S1306, S1307: The L2 U2N Remote UE and gNB establish security following the Uu security mode procedure and the security messages are forwarded through the L2 U2N Relay UE.
- S1308, S1309 and S1310: The gNB sends an RRCReconfiguration message to the L2 U2N Remote UE via the L2 U2N Relay UE, to setup the end-to-end SRB2/DRBs of the L2 U2N Remote UE. The L2 U2N Remote UE sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the gNB via the L2 U2N Relay UE as a response. In addition, the gNB may configure additional Uu Relay RLC channels between the gNB and L2 U2N Relay UE, and PC5 Relay RLC channels between L2 U2N Relay UE and L2 U2N Remote UE for the relaying traffic

상기 시나리오에서, 연결 설정 절차 외에 L2 UE-to-Network 릴레이의 경우:In the above scenario, in addition to the connection setup procedure, for L2 UE-to-Network relay:

- RRC 재구성 및 RRC 연결 해제 절차는 WI 단계에 남겨진 메시지 내용/구성 설계와 함께 레거시 RRC 절차를 재사용할 수 있다.- RRC reconfiguration and RRC disconnection procedures can reuse legacy RRC procedures with message content/configuration design left in the WI phase.

- RRC 연결 재설정 및 RRC 연결 재개 절차는 메시지 내용/구성 설계와 함께 릴레이 특정 부분을 처리하기 위해 위의 L2 U2N 릴레이의 연결 설정 절차를 고려함으로써 기존 RRC 절차를 베이스라인으로 재사용할 수 있다. 메시지 컨텐트/구성은 추후 정의될 수 있다.- RRC connection re-establishment and RRC connection resumption procedures can reuse existing RRC procedures as a baseline by considering the connection establishment procedure of the above L2 U2N relay to handle relay-specific parts along with message content/composition design. Message content/composition can be defined later.

도 14은 L2 U2U 릴레이 (UE-to-UE Relay)의 컨트롤 플레인 절차를 설명하기 위한 도면이다.Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the control plane procedure of L2 U2U relay (UE-to-UE Relay).

L2 U2U 릴레이 (UE-to-UE Relay)의 컨트롤 플레인 절차는 하기의 표 6과 같이 정의될 수 있다.The control plane procedure of L2 U2U relay (UE-to-UE Relay) can be defined as shown in Table 6 below.

1. The L2 U2U Remote UE, L2 U2U Relay UE, and peer L2 U2U Remote UE perform discovery procedure or integrated discovery procedure.
2a. The L2 U2U Remote UE establishes/modifies a PC5-RRC connection with the selected L2 U2U Relay UE (i.e., as specified in TS 23.304 [48]).
2b. The L2 U2U Relay UE establishes/modifies a PC5-RRC connection with the peer L2 U2U Remote UE (i.e., as specified in TS 23.304 [48]).
3. The L2 U2U Relay UE allocates two local IDs and the two local IDs are delivered via RRCReconfigurationSidelink message to each of the L2 U2U Remote UEs: one local ID to identify the L2 U2U Remote UE, the other local ID to identify the peer L2 U2U Remote UE. When the local IDs are delivered, an L2 ID of the peer L2 U2U Remote UE is also delivered to the U2U Remote UE for making the association between the local ID and the L2 ID of the peer U2U Remote UE.
4. The L2 U2U Remote UE establishes end-to-end PC5-RRC connection with the peer L2 U2U Remote UE via the L2 U2U Relay UE. For the end-to-end connection establishment, fixed indexes (i.e., 0/1/2/3) are defined for end-to-end SL-SRB 0/1/2/3 respectively, and specified PC5 Relay RLC Channel configuration is used on each hop. The sidelink UE capability is exchanged between the L2 U2U Remote UEs via PC5-RRC (e.g., SL-SRB3) message.
5. The L2 U2U Remote UE sends to the L2 U2U Relay UE all the QoS profiles for the end-to-end QoS flows via PC5-RRC message.
6. The L2 U2U Relay UE performs QoS split only for PDB.
NOTE: It is up to L2 U2U Relay UE implementation on how to split PDB.
7. The L2 U2U Relay UE sends the split QoS value (i.e., PDB) via PC5-RRC message to the L2 U2U Remote UE.
8. The L2 U2U Remote UE or the serving gNB of the L2 U2U Remote UE derives the PDCP and SDAP configuration for end-to-end SL-DRB. The L2 U2U Remote UE provides the portion of the configuration related to reception to the peer L2 U2U Remote UE using end-to-end RRCReconfigurationSidelink messages. The end-to-end bearer IDs for SL-SRB and SL-DRB are used as input for the L2 U2U Relay ciphering and integrity protection at SL PDCP.
9a. The L2 U2U Remote UE or the serving gNB of the L2 U2U Remote UE derives the first hop configuration (e.g. PC5 Relay RLC Channel configuration) for SL-DRB, The L2 U2U Remote UE provides the L2 U2U Relay UE with the configuration related to receiving on the first hop (i.e., Rx by the relay UE), using per-hop RRCReconfigurationSidelink message.
9b. The L2 U2U Relay UE or the serving gNB of the L2 U2U Relay UE derives the second hop configuration (e.g. PC5 Relay RLC Channel configuration) for each SL-DRB. The Relay UE provides the peer L2 U2U Remote UE with the configuration related to receiving on the second hop (i.e., RX by the peer remote UE), using per-hop RRCReconfigurationSidelink message.
10. The L2 U2U Remote UE and the peer L2 U2U Remote UE transmit or receive data via L2 U2U Relay UE
1. The L2 U2U Remote UE, L2 U2U Relay UE, and peer L2 U2U Remote UE perform discovery procedure or integrated discovery procedure.
2a. The L2 U2U Remote UE establishes/modifies a PC5-RRC connection with the selected L2 U2U Relay UE (ie, as specified in TS 23.304 [48]).
2b. The L2 U2U Relay UE establishes/modifies a PC5-RRC connection with the peer L2 U2U Remote UE (ie, as specified in TS 23.304 [48]).
3. The L2 U2U Relay UE allocates two local IDs and the two local IDs are delivered via RRCReconfigurationSidelink message to each of the L2 U2U Remote UEs: one local ID to identify the L2 U2U Remote UE, the other local ID to identify the peer L2 U2U Remote UE. When the local IDs are delivered, an L2 ID of the peer L2 U2U Remote UE is also delivered to the U2U Remote UE for making the association between the local ID and the L2 ID of the peer U2U Remote UE.
4. The L2 U2U Remote UE establishes end-to-end PC5-RRC connection with the peer L2 U2U Remote UE via the L2 U2U Relay UE. For the end-to-end connection establishment, fixed indexes (ie, 0/1/2/3) are defined for end-to-end SL-SRB 0/1/2/3 respectively, and specified PC5 Relay RLC Channel configuration is used on each hop. The sidelink UE capability is exchanged between the L2 U2U Remote UEs via PC5-RRC (eg, SL-SRB3) message.
5. The L2 U2U Remote UE sends to the L2 U2U Relay UE all the QoS profiles for the end-to-end QoS flows via PC5-RRC message.
6. The L2 U2U Relay UE performs QoS split only for PDB.
NOTE: It is up to L2 U2U Relay UE implementation on how to split PDB.
7. The L2 U2U Relay UE sends the split QoS value (ie, PDB) via PC5-RRC message to the L2 U2U Remote UE.
8. The L2 U2U Remote UE or the serving gNB of the L2 U2U Remote UE derives the PDCP and SDAP configuration for end-to-end SL-DRB. The L2 U2U Remote UE provides the portion of the configuration related to reception to the peer L2 U2U Remote UE using end-to-end RRCReconfigurationSidelink messages. The end-to-end bearer IDs for SL-SRB and SL-DRB are used as input for the L2 U2U Relay ciphering and integrity protection at SL PDCP.
9a. The L2 U2U Remote UE or the serving gNB of the L2 U2U Remote UE derives the first hop configuration (eg PC5 Relay RLC Channel configuration) for SL-DRB, The L2 U2U Remote UE provides the L2 U2U Relay UE with the configuration related to receiving on the first hop (ie, Rx by the relay UE), using per-hop RRCReconfigurationSidelink message.
9b. The L2 U2U Relay UE or the serving gNB of the L2 U2U Relay UE derives the second hop configuration (eg PC5 Relay RLC Channel configuration) for each SL-DRB. The Relay UE provides the peer L2 U2U Remote UE with the configuration related to receiving on the second hop (ie, RX by the peer remote UE), using per-hop RRCReconfigurationSidelink message.
10. The L2 U2U Remote UE and the peer L2 U2U Remote UE transmit or receive data via L2 U2U Relay UE

여기서, U2U 리모트 UE와 U2U 릴레이 UE 간의 PC5 연결 또는 직접 연결은 1st-홉 연결로 정의될 수 있고, U2U 릴레이 UE와 피어 U2U 리모트 UE (또는, 타겟 리모트 UE) 간의 PC5 연결 또는 직접 연결은 2nd-홉 연결로 정의될 수 있다.Here, the PC5 connection or direct connection between the U2U remote UE and the U2U relay UE can be defined as a 1st-hop connection, and the PC5 connection or direct connection between the U2U relay UE and the peer U2U remote UE (or target remote UE) can be defined as a 2nd-hop connection.

이하에서는, 디스커버리 절차 없이 U2U 릴레이 선택을 수행하는 방법을 설명한다.Below, we describe how to perform U2U relay selection without a discovery procedure.

도 15 및 도 16은 릴레이 디스커버리 없이 U2U 릴레이 선택 (UE-to-UE Relay Selection)하는 절차를 설명하기 위한 도면이다.FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are diagrams for explaining a procedure for U2U relay selection (UE-to-UE Relay Selection) without relay discovery.

소정의 시나리오 (TR 23.752 6.8 절)를 참조하면, 소스 (source UE)가 타겟 (target) UE와 통신을 원할 경우, 먼저 소스 UE는 타겟 UE 정보가 포함된 직접 통신 요청 (Direct Communication Request) 또는 요청(Solicitation) 메시지를 전송하여 타겟 UE를 찾으려고 시도할 수 있다. 소스 UE가 타겟 UE에 직접 도달할 수 없는 경우, 소스 UE는 타겟 UE에 도달하기 위한 U2U 릴레이를 탐색 (discovery)을 시도할 수 있고, 또한, 타겟 UE를 탐색 (discovery)하기 위한 릴레이를 트리거할 수도 있습니다 (If the source UE cannot reach the target UE directly, it will try to discover a UE-to-UE relay to reach the target UE which may also trigger the relay to discover the target UE). 소스 UE는 하기의 두 가지 대안들에 기반하여 타겟 UE의 검색 및/또는 U2ㅕ 릴레이의 검색/선택을 통합시킬 수 있다. For a given scenario (TR 23.752 section 6.8), when a source UE wants to communicate with a target UE, the source UE may first try to find the target UE by transmitting a Direct Communication Request or Solicitation message containing target UE information. If the source UE cannot reach the target UE directly, it will try to discover a UE-to-UE relay to reach the target UE which may also trigger the relay to discover the target UE. The source UE may integrate the discovery of the target UE and/or the discovery/selection of a U2U relay based on the following two alternatives:

- 대안 1: U2U 릴레이 탐색 (discovery)/선택은 유니캐스트 링크 설정 절차(TS 23.287의 clause 6.3.3 참조) 에 통합될 수 있다.- Alternative 1: U2U relay discovery/selection can be integrated into the unicast link setup procedure (see clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287).

- 대안 2: U2U 릴레이 탐색 (discovery)/선택은 모델 B 직접 탐색 절차 (Model B direct discovery procedure)에 통합될 수 있다.- Alternative 2: U2U relay discovery/selection can be integrated into the Model B direct discovery procedure.

통신에 릴레이를 사용할 수 있는지 여부를 나타내기 위해 직접 통신 요청 또는 요청 메시지에 새로운 필드가 추가될 수 있다. 상기 새로운 필드는 Relay_indication로 정의될 수 있다. (소스) UE가 직접 통신 요청 (Direct Communication Request) 또는 요청(Solicitation) 메시지를 브로드캐스트하려는 경우, 상기 요청 메시지는 U2U 릴레이를 사용할 수 있는지 여부에 대한 Relay_indication를 포함할 수 있다. 한편, 릴리스 17의 경우에 Relay_indication의 값이 단일 홉으로 제한되는 것으로 가정될 수 있다.A new field may be added to the Direct Communication Request or Solicitation message to indicate whether a relay is available for communication. The new field may be defined as Relay_indication. When a (source) UE intends to broadcast a Direct Communication Request or Solicitation message, the request message may include Relay_indication for whether a U2U relay is available. Meanwhile, for Release 17, it may be assumed that the value of Relay_indication is restricted to a single hop.

U2U 릴레이가 상기 Relay_indication이 설정된 상기 요청 메시지를 수신할 경우, 상기 U2U 릴레이는 상기 요청 메시지를 포워딩할지 여부를 결정할 수 있다 (즉, 메시지를 수정하고 근처에서 브로드캐스트). 예컨대, 상기 U2U 릴레이는 Relay Service Code가 있는 경우에 Application ID, authorization policy (예: 특정 ProSe 서비스에 대한 Relay), Relay의 현재 트래픽 부하, Source UE와 Relay UE 간의 무선 상태 등을 고려하여 상기 요청 메시지의 포워딩 여부를 결정할 수 있다.When the U2U relay receives the request message with the Relay_indication set, the U2U relay can decide whether to forward the request message (i.e., modify the message and broadcast it nearby). For example, the U2U relay can decide whether to forward the request message by considering the Application ID, authorization policy (e.g., Relay for a specific ProSe service), current traffic load of the Relay, radio status between the Source UE and the Relay UE, etc. if there is a Relay Service Code.

또는, 다수의 U2U 릴레이들이 상기 타겟 UE에 도달하기 위해 사용될 수 있거나 (제1 경우), 타겟 UE가 소스 UE로부터 상기 요청 메시지를 직접 수신할 수도 있는 경우 (제2 경우)가 존재할 수 있다. 이 경우, 상기 타겟 UE는 상기 제1 경우 또는 상기 제2 경우 중에서 어느 하나의 경우에 대한 응답 여부를 선택할 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 타겟 UE는 신호 강도, local policy (예컨대, UE-UE 릴레이의 트래픽 부하), 릴레이 서비스 코드 (릴레이 서비스 코드가 있는 경우) 및/또는 운영자 정책 (예컨대, 항상 직접 통신을 선호하거나 일부 특정 UE-UE 릴레이만 사용)에 기초하여 상기 제1 경우 또는 상기 제2 경우 중에서 어느 하나의 경우에 대한 응답 여부를 선택할 수 있다Alternatively, multiple U2U relays may be used to reach the target UE (case 1), or the target UE may directly receive the request message from the source UE (case 2). In this case, the target UE may choose whether to respond to either the first or the second case. For example, the target UE may choose whether to respond to either the first or the second case based on signal strength, local policy (e.g., traffic load of the UE-UE relay), relay service code (if there is a relay service code), and/or operator policy (e.g., always preferring direct communication or using only some specific UE-UE relays).

또는, 상기 소스 UE는 다수의 U2U 릴레이들로부터 상기 요청 메시지에 대한 응답을 수신할 수도 있고, 상기 타겟 UE으로부터 직접 상기 요청 메시지에 대한 응답을 수신할 수 있다. 이 경우, 상기 소스 UE는 신호 강도 또는 운영자 정책(예: 항상 직접 통신을 선호하거나 일부 특정 UE-UE 릴레이만 사용)에 기초하여 통신 경로 (직접 경로 또는 간접 경로)를 선택할 수 있다.Alternatively, the source UE may receive responses to the request message from multiple U2U relays, or may receive responses to the request message directly from the target UE. In this case, the source UE may select a communication path (direct path or indirect path) based on signal strength or operator policy (e.g., always preferring direct communication or using only some specific UE-UE relays).

구체적으로, 상술한 대안 1은 표 7 및 도 15에 기술된 바와 같이 수행될 수 있다.Specifically, the above-described alternative 1 can be performed as described in Table 7 and FIG. 15.

6.8.2 Procedures
6.8.2.1 UE-to-UE relay discovery and selection is integrated into the unicast link establishment procedure (Alternative 1)
Fig 14 illustrates the procedure of the proposed method.
0. UEs are authorized to use the service provided by the UE-to-UE relays. UE-to-UE relays are authorized to provide service of relaying traffic among UEs. The authorization and the parameter provisioning can use solutions for KI#8, e.g. Sol#36. The authorization can be done when UEs/relays are registered to the network. Security related parameters may be provisioned so that a UE and a relay can verify the authorization with each other if needed.
1. UE-1 wants to establish unicast communication with UE-2 and the communication can be either through direct link with UE-2 or via a UE-to-UE relay. Then UE-1 broadcasts Direct Communication Request with relay_indication enabled. The message will be received by relay-1, relay-2. The message may also be received by UE-2 if it is in the proximity of UE-1. UE-1 includes source UE info, target UE info, Application ID, as well as Relay Service Code if there is any. If UE-1 does not want relay to be involved in the communication, then it will made relay_indication disabled.
NOTE 1: The data type of relay_indication can be determined in Stage 3. Details of Direct Communication Request/Accept messages will be determined in stage 3.
2. Relay-1 and relay-2 decide to participate in the procedure. They broadcast a new Direct Communication Request message in their proximity without relay_indication enabled. If a relay receives this message, it will just drop it. When a relay broadcasts the Direct Communication Request message, it includes source UE info, target UE info and Relay UE info (e.g. Relay UE ID) in the message and use Relay's L2 address as the source Layer-2 ID. The Relay maintains association between the source UE information (e.g. source UE L2 ID) and the new Direct Communication Request.
3. UE-2 receives the Direct Communication Requests from relay-1 and relay-2. UE-2 may also receive Direct Communication Request message directly from the UE-1 if the UE-2 is in the communication range of UE-1.
4. UE-2 chooses relay-1 and replies with Direct Communication Accept message. If UE-2 directly receives the Direct Communication Request from UE-1, it may choose to setup a direct communication link by sending the Direct Communication Accept message directly to UE-1. After receiving Direct Communication Accept, a UE-to-UE relay retrieves the source UE information stored in step 2 and sends the Direct Communication Accept message to the source UE with its Relay UE info added in the message.
After step 4, UE-1 and UE-2 have respectively setup the PC5 links with the chosen UE-to-UE relay.
NOTE 2: The security establishment between the UE1 and Relay-1, and between Relay-1 and UE-2 are performed before the Relay-1 and UE-2 send Direct Communication Accept message. Details of the authentication/ security establishment procedure are determined by SA WG3. The security establishment procedure can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the source (or target) UE and the relay which can be used for relaying the traffic.
5. UE-1 receives the Direct Communication Accept message from relay-1. UE-1 chooses path according to e.g. policies (e.g. always choose direct path if it is possible), signal strength, etc. If UE-1 receives Direct Communication Accept / Response message request accept directly from UE-2, it may choose to setup a direct PC5 L2 link with UE-2 as described in clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287 [5], then step 6 is skipped.
6a. For the L3 UE-to-UE Relay case, UE-1 and UE-2 finish setting up the communication link via the chosen UE-to-UE relay. The link setup information may vary depending on the type of relay, e.g. L2 or L3 relaying. Then UE-1 and UE-2 can communicate via the relay. Regarding IP address allocation for the source/remote UE, the addresses can be either assigned by the relay or by the UE itself (e.g. link-local IP address) as defined in clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287 [5].
6b. For the Layer 2 UE-to-UE Relay case, the source and target UE can setup an end-to-end PC5 link via the relay. UE-1 sends a unicast E2E Direct Communication Request message to UE-2 via the Relay-1, and UE-2 responds with a unicast E2E Direct Communication Accept message to UE-1 via the Relay-1. Relay-1 transfers the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer.
NOTE 3: How Relay-1 can transfer the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer requires cooperation with RAN2 during the normative phase.
NOTE 4: In order to make a relay or path selection, the source UE can setup a timer after sending out the Direct Communication Request for collecting the corresponding response messages before making a decision. Similarly, the target UE can also setup a timer after receiving the first copy of the Direct Communication Request / message for collecting multiple copies of the message from different paths before making a decision.
NOTE 5: In the first time when a UE receives a message from a UE-to-UE relay, the UE needs to verify if the relay is authorized be a UE-to-UE relay. Similarly, the UE-to-UE relay may also need to verify if the UE is authorized to use the relay service. The verification details and the how to secure the communication between two UEs through a UE-to-UE relay is to be defined by SA WG3.
6.8.2 Procedures
6.8.2.1 UE-to-UE relay discovery and selection is integrated into the unicast link establishment procedure (Alternative 1)
Fig 14 illustrates the procedure of the proposed method.
0. UEs are authorized to use the service provided by the UE-to-UE relays. UE-to-UE relays are authorized to provide service of relaying traffic among UEs. The authorization and the parameter provisioning can use solutions for KI#8, eg Sol#36. The authorization can be done when UEs/relays are registered to the network. Security related parameters may be provisioned so that a UE and a relay can verify the authorization with each other if needed.
1. UE-1 wants to establish unicast communication with UE-2 and the communication can be either through direct link with UE-2 or via a UE-to-UE relay. Then UE-1 broadcasts Direct Communication Request with relay_indication enabled. The message will be received by relay-1, relay-2. The message may also be received by UE-2 if it is in the proximity of UE-1. UE-1 includes source UE info, target UE info, Application ID, as well as Relay Service Code if there is any. If UE-1 does not want relay to be involved in the communication, then it will made relay_indication disabled.
NOTE 1: The data type of relay_indication can be determined in Stage 3. Details of Direct Communication Request/Accept messages will be determined in stage 3.
2. Relay-1 and relay-2 decide to participate in the procedure. They broadcast a new Direct Communication Request message in their proximity without relay_indication enabled. If a relay receives this message, it will just drop it. When a relay broadcasts the Direct Communication Request message, it includes source UE info, target UE info and Relay UE info (eg Relay UE ID) in the message and use Relay's L2 address as the source Layer-2 ID. The Relay maintains association between the source UE information (eg source UE L2 ID) and the new Direct Communication Request.
3. UE-2 receives the Direct Communication Requests from relay-1 and relay-2. UE-2 may also receive Direct Communication Request message directly from the UE-1 if the UE-2 is in the communication range of UE-1.
4. UE-2 chooses relay-1 and replies with Direct Communication Accept message. If UE-2 directly receives the Direct Communication Request from UE-1, it may choose to setup a direct communication link by sending the Direct Communication Accept message directly to UE-1. After receiving Direct Communication Accept, a UE-to-UE relay retrieves the source UE information stored in step 2 and sends the Direct Communication Accept message to the source UE with its Relay UE info added in the message.
After step 4, UE-1 and UE-2 have respectively setup the PC5 links with the chosen UE-to-UE relay.
NOTE 2: The security establishment between the UE1 and Relay-1, and between Relay-1 and UE-2 are performed before the Relay-1 and UE-2 send Direct Communication Accept message. Details of the authentication/security establishment procedure are determined by SA WG3. The security establishment procedure can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the source (or target) UE and the relay which can be used for relaying the traffic.
5. UE-1 receives the Direct Communication Accept message from relay-1. UE-1 chooses path according to eg policies (eg always choose direct path if it is possible), signal strength, etc. If UE-1 receives Direct Communication Accept / Response message request accept directly from UE-2, it may choose to setup a direct PC5 L2 link with UE-2 as described in clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287 [5], then step 6 is skipped.
6a. For the L3 UE-to-UE Relay case, UE-1 and UE-2 finish setting up the communication link via the chosen UE-to-UE relay. The link setup information may vary depending on the type of relay, eg L2 or L3 relaying. Then UE-1 and UE-2 can communicate via the relay. Regarding IP address allocation for the source/remote UE, the addresses can be either assigned by the relay or by the UE itself (eg link-local IP address) as defined in clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287 [5].
6b. For the Layer 2 UE-to-UE Relay case, the source and target UE can setup an end-to-end PC5 link via the relay. UE-1 sends a unicast E2E Direct Communication Request message to UE-2 via the Relay-1, and UE-2 responds with a unicast E2E Direct Communication Accept message to UE-1 via the Relay-1. Relay-1 transfers the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer.
NOTE 3: How Relay-1 can transfer the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer requires cooperation with RAN2 during the normative phase.
NOTE 4: In order to make a relay or path selection, the source UE can setup a timer after sending out the Direct Communication Request for collecting the corresponding response messages before making a decision. Similarly, the target UE can also setup a timer after receiving the first copy of the Direct Communication Request / message for collecting multiple copies of the message from different paths before making a decision.
NOTE 5: In the first time when a UE receives a message from a UE-to-UE relay, the UE needs to verify if the relay is authorized to be a UE-to-UE relay. Similarly, the UE-to-UE relay may also need to verify if the UE is authorized to use the relay service. The verification details and the how to secure the communication between two UEs through a UE-to-UE relay is to be defined by SA WG3.

상술한 대안 2은 표 8 및 도 16에 기술된 바와 같이 수행될 수 있다.Alternative 2 described above can be performed as described in Table 8 and Fig. 16.

6.8.2.2 UE-to-UE relay discovery and selection is integrated into Model B direct discovery procedure (Alternative 2)
Depicted in Fig 15 is the procedure for UE-UE Relay discovery Model B, and the discovery/selection procedure is separated from hop by hop and end-to-end link establishment.
1. UE-1 broadcasts discovery solicitation message carrying UE-1 info, target UE info (UE-2), Application ID, Relay Service Code if any, the UE-1 can also indicate relay_indication enabled.
2. On reception of discovery solicitation, the candidate Relay UE-R broadcasts discovery solicitation carrying UE-1 info, UE-R info, Target UE info. The Relay UE-R uses Relay's L2 address as the source Layer-2 ID.
3. The target UE-2 responds the discovery message. If the UE-2 receives discovery solicitation message in step 1, then UE-2 responds discovery response in step 3b with UE-1 info, UE-2 info. If not and UE-2 receives discovery solicitation in step 2, then UE-2 responds discovery response message in step 3a with UE-1 info, UE-R info, UE-2 info.
4. On reception of discovery response in step 3a, UE-R sends discovery response with UE-1 info, UE-R info, UE-2 info. If more than one candidate Relay UEs responding discovery response message, UE-1 can select one Relay UE based on e.g. implementation or link qualification.
5. The source and target UE may need to setup PC5 links with the relay before communicating with each other. Step 5a can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the UE-1 and UE-R which can be used for relaying. Step 5b can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the UE-2 and UE-R which can be used for relaying.
6a. Same as step 6a described in clause 6.8.2.1.
6b. For the Layer-2 UE-to-UE Relay, the E2E unicast Direct Communication Request message is sent from UE1 to the selected Relay via the per-hop link (established in steps 5a) and the Adaptation layer info identifying the peer UE (UE3) as the destination. The UE-to-UE Relay transfers the E2E messages based on the identity information of peer UE in the Adaptation Layer. The initiator (UE1) knows the Adaptation layer info identifying the peer UE (UE3) after a discovery procedure. UE3 responds with E2E unicast Direct Communication Accept message in the same way.
NOTE 1: For the Layer 2 UE-to-UE Relay case, whether step5b is performed before step 6b or triggered during step 6b will be decided at normative phase.
NOTE 2: How Relay-1 can transfer the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer requires cooperation with RAN2 during the normative phase.
6.8.3 Impacts on services, entities and interfaces
UE impacts to support new Relay related functions.
6.8.2.2 UE-to-UE relay discovery and selection is integrated into Model B direct discovery procedure (Alternative 2)
Depicted in Fig 15 is the procedure for UE-UE Relay discovery Model B, and the discovery/selection procedure is separated from hop by hop and end-to-end link establishment.
1. UE-1 broadcasts discovery solicitation message carrying UE-1 info, target UE info (UE-2), Application ID, Relay Service Code if any, the UE-1 can also indicate relay_indication enabled.
2. On reception of discovery solicitation, the candidate Relay UE-R broadcasts discovery solicitation carrying UE-1 info, UE-R info, Target UE info. The Relay UE-R uses Relay's L2 address as the source Layer-2 ID.
3. The target UE-2 responds the discovery message. If the UE-2 receives discovery solicitation message in step 1, then UE-2 responds discovery response in step 3b with UE-1 info, UE-2 info. If not and UE-2 receives discovery solicitation in step 2, then UE-2 responds discovery response message in step 3a with UE-1 info, UE-R info, UE-2 info.
4. On reception of discovery response in step 3a, UE-R sends discovery response with UE-1 info, UE-R info, UE-2 info. If more than one candidate Relay UEs responding discovery response message, UE-1 can select one Relay UE based on eg implementation or link qualification.
5. The source and target UE may need to setup PC5 links with the relay before communicating with each other. Step 5a can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the UE-1 and UE-R which can be used for relaying. Step 5b can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the UE-2 and UE-R which can be used for relaying.
6a. Same as step 6a described in clause 6.8.2.1.
6b. For the Layer-2 UE-to-UE Relay, the E2E unicast Direct Communication Request message is sent from UE1 to the selected Relay via the per-hop link (established in steps 5a) and the Adaptation layer info identifying the peer UE (UE3 ) as the destination. The UE-to-UE Relay transfers the E2E messages based on the identity information of peer UE in the Adaptation Layer. The initiator (UE1) knows the Adaptation layer info identifying the peer UE (UE3) after a discovery procedure. UE3 responds with E2E unicast Direct Communication Accept message in the same way.
NOTE 1: For the Layer 2 UE-to-UE Relay case, whether step5b is performed before step 6b or triggered during step 6b will be decided at normative phase.
NOTE 2: How Relay-1 can transfer the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer requires cooperation with RAN2 during the normative phase.
6.8.3 Impacts on services, entities and interfaces
UE impacts to support new Relay related functions.

도 17는 L2 U2U 릴레이를 위한 평면 프로토콜 스택을 간략하게 도시한다.Figure 17 schematically illustrates a flat protocol stack for L2 U2U relay.

도 17(a)는 L2 U2U 릴레이를 위한 사용자 평면 프로토콜 스택을 도시하고, 도 17(b)는 L2 U2U 릴레이를 위한 제어 평면 프로토콜 스택을 도시한다. 다음 표 9은 Layer-2 릴레이의 Architecture 및 Protocol Stack에 대한 도 17에 관련된 설명이다.Fig. 17(a) illustrates a user plane protocol stack for an L2 U2U relay, and Fig. 17(b) illustrates a control plane protocol stack for an L2 U2U relay. Table 9 below provides a description related to Fig. 17 regarding the Architecture and Protocol Stack of a Layer-2 Relay.

5.5 Layer-2 Relay
5.5.1 Architecture and Protocol Stack
For L2 UE-to-UE Relay architecture, the protocol stacks are similar to L2 UE-to-Network Relay other than the fact that the termination points are two Remote UEs. The protocol stacks for the user plane and control plane of L2 UE-to-UE Relay architecture are described in Figure 5.5.1-1 and Figure 5.5.1-2.
An adaptation layer is supported over the second PC5 link (i.e. the PC5 link between Relay UE and Destination UE) for L2 UE-to-UE Relay. For L2 UE-to-UE Relay, the adaptation layer is put over RLC sublayer for both CP and UP over the second PC5 link. The sidelink SDAP/PDCP and RRC are terminated between two Remote UEs, while RLC, MAC and PHY are terminated in each PC5 link.
For the first hop of L2 UE-to-UE Relay,
- The N:1 mapping is supported by first hop PC5 adaptation layer between Remote UE SL Radio Bearers and first hop PC5 RLC channels for relaying.
- The adaptation layer over first PC5 hop between Source Remote UE and Relay UE supports to identify traffic destined to different Destination Remote UEs.
For the second hop of L2 UE-to-UE Relay,
- The second hop PC5 adaptation layer can be used to support bearer mapping between the ingress RLC channels over first PC5 hop and egress RLC channels over second PC5 hop at Relay UE.
- PC5 Adaptation layer supports the N:1 bearer mapping between multiple ingress PC5 RLC channels over first PC5 hop and one egress PC5 RLC channel over second PC5 hop and supports the Remote UE identification function.
For L2 UE-to-UE Relay,
- The identity information of Remote UE end-to-end Radio Bearer is included in the adaptation layer in first and second PC5 hop.
- In addition, the identity information of Source Remote UE and/or the identity information of Destination Remote UE are candidate information to be included in the adaptation layer, which are to be decided in WI phase.
5.5 Layer-2 Relay
5.5.1 Architecture and Protocol Stack
For L2 UE-to-UE Relay architecture, the protocol stacks are similar to L2 UE-to-Network Relay other than the fact that the termination points are two Remote UEs. The protocol stacks for the user plane and control plane of L2 UE-to-UE Relay architecture are described in Figure 5.5.1-1 and Figure 5.5.1-2.
An adaptation layer is supported over the second PC5 link (ie the PC5 link between Relay UE and Destination UE) for L2 UE-to-UE Relay. For L2 UE-to-UE Relay, the adaptation layer is put over RLC sublayer for both CP and UP over the second PC5 link. The sidelink SDAP/PDCP and RRC are terminated between two Remote UEs, while RLC, MAC and PHY are terminated in each PC5 link.
For the first hop of L2 UE-to-UE Relay,
- The N:1 mapping is supported by first hop PC5 adaptation layer between Remote UE SL Radio Bearers and first hop PC5 RLC channels for relaying.
- The adaptation layer over first PC5 hop between Source Remote UE and Relay UE supports to identify traffic destined to different Destination Remote UEs.
For the second hop of L2 UE-to-UE Relay,
- The second hop PC5 adaptation layer can be used to support bearer mapping between the ingress RLC channels over first PC5 hop and egress RLC channels over second PC5 hop at Relay UE.
- PC5 Adaptation layer supports the N:1 bearer mapping between multiple ingress PC5 RLC channels over first PC5 hop and one egress PC5 RLC channel over second PC5 hop and supports the Remote UE identification function.
For L2 UE-to-UE Relay,
- The identity information of Remote UE end-to-end Radio Bearer is included in the adaptation layer in first and second PC5 hop.
- In addition, the identity information of Source Remote UE and/or the identity information of Destination Remote UE are candidate information to be included in the adaptation layer, which are to be decided in WI phase.

상술한 내용에서 단일 홉 기반 (즉, 하나의 릴레이 UE)한 U2U 릴레이 및 U2N 릴레이 동작을 기술하고 있으나, U2U 릴레이 및 U2N 릴레이 동작은 하나가 아닌 복수의 릴레이 UE들을 이용한 멀티-홉에 기반하여 동작될 수도 있다. 따라서, 이하에서는, 하나가 아닌 복수의 릴레이 UE들을 이용한 멀티-홉에 기반하여 U2U 릴레이 및 U2N 릴레이 동작을 수행하는 방법을 자세히 설명한다.Although the above description describes U2U relay and U2N relay operations based on a single hop (i.e., one relay UE), the U2U relay and U2N relay operations may also be operated based on a multi-hop using multiple relay UEs rather than one. Therefore, the following describes in detail a method for performing U2U relay and U2N relay operations based on a multi-hop using multiple relay UEs rather than one.

한편, 후술할 멀티 홉 릴레이 동작은 U2U 릴레이 동작뿐만 아니라, U2N 릴레이 동작에 대해서도 적용될 수 있다. 예컨대, 후술된 소스 릴레이 UE 또는 타겟 릴레이 UE를 기지국 (또는, 네트워크)로 대체함으로써 U2N 릴레이 동작에 대해서도 후술할 제안 방법이 적용될 수 있다. 이하에서는, 설명의 편의를 위해, U2U 릴레이 동작을 위주로 설명한다.Meanwhile, the multi-hop relay operation described later can be applied not only to the U2U relay operation but also to the U2N relay operation. For example, the proposed method described later can be applied to the U2N relay operation by replacing the source relay UE or the target relay UE described later with a base station (or, network). In the following, for convenience of explanation, the U2U relay operation will be mainly described.

멀티 홉 릴레이 동작을 위한 릴레이 (재)선택 방법Relay (re)selection method for multi-hop relay operation

1. 멀티 홉 릴레이 동작에서 소스 리모트 UE는 릴레이 UE를 선택할 수 있다. 소스 리모트 UE로부터 선택된 릴레이 UE는 다음 홉 (hop)의 릴레이 UE를 선택할 수 있다. 릴레이 UE가 다음 홉의 릴레이 UE를 선택하는 방법은 하기와 같을 수 있다.1. In a multi-hop relay operation, a source remote UE can select a relay UE. The relay UE selected from the source remote UE can select a relay UE of the next hop. The method for the relay UE to select a relay UE of the next hop can be as follows.

- 릴리이 UE가 선택하려는 다른 릴레이 UE 간의 RSRP (Reference Signals Received Power; 예컨대, SL(sidelink)-RSRP/SD(sidelink discovery)-RSRP) 값이 미리 구성된 임계 세기 이상인 경우,- If the RSRP (Reference Signals Received Power; e.g., SL (sidelink)-RSRP/SD (sidelink discovery)-RSRP) value between other relay UEs to be selected by the relay UE is greater than or equal to a pre-configured threshold strength,

- 및/또는, 선택하려는 다른 후보 릴레이 UE들 중에서 타겟 리모트 UE까지 도착할 수 있는 홉의 수가 가장 작은 후보 릴레이 UE. 이때, 타겟 리모트 UE까지 도착할 수 있는 홉의 수는 PC5-S 메시지 (예컨대, discovery, discovery response, DCR/DCA 등), 및/또는 PC5-RRC 메시지 (예컨대, RRCReconfigurationSidelink, RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink)에 포함되는 정보일 수 있다.- and/or, a candidate relay UE having the smallest number of hops that can reach the target remote UE among other candidate relay UEs to be selected. In this case, the number of hops that can reach the target remote UE may be information included in a PC5-S message (e.g., discovery, discovery response, DCR/DCA, etc.), and/or a PC5-RRC message (e.g., RRCReconfigurationSidelink, RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink).

- 및/또는, 선택하려는 다른 후보 릴레이 UE들 중에서 잔여 PDB (Packet Delay Budget)가 가장 많이 남아 있는 후보 릴레이 UE 등- and/or, among other candidate relay UEs to be selected, the candidate relay UE with the largest remaining PDB (Packet Delay Budget), etc.

2. 멀티 홉 U2U 릴레이 동작에서, 릴레이 동작을 위한 단말 간의 직접 연결 (또는, 홉 연결)에 대한 RLF (Radio Link Failure)가 발생한 경우, 릴레이 UE는 하기와 같은 동작들 중에서 적어도 하나의 동작을 수행할 수 있다.2. In a multi-hop U2U relay operation, if an RLF (Radio Link Failure) occurs for a direct connection (or hop connection) between terminals for relay operation, the relay UE may perform at least one of the following operations.

(1) 경우 1(1) Case 1

멀리 홉 기반 릴레이 동작을 위한 홉 연결 (또는, 다른 릴레이 UE와의 홉 연결)에 대한 RLF가 감지된 경우, 상기 릴레이 UE는 상기 RLF의 감지를 소스 리모트 UE에 보고할 수 있다. 상기 릴레이 UE는 상기 소스 리모트 UE에 자신과 관련된 홉 (또는 홉 연결)에서 RLF가 발생했음을 알리는 방법은 하기와 같다.When an RLF is detected for a hop connection (or a hop connection with another relay UE) for a far-hop based relay operation, the relay UE can report the detection of the RLF to the source remote UE. The relay UE can inform the source remote UE that an RLF has occurred on a hop (or hop connection) associated with it as follows.

상기 릴레이 UE는 자신과 연결된 홉 연결에 대한 RLF를 보고하기 위한 PC5-RRC 메시지 (예컨대, notification message)를 생성할 수 있다. 상기 생성된 메시지는 adaptation layer의 SRC (Source 또는 Source UE)/DST (Destination 또는 Destination UE) 주소 (address)가 기존 릴레이 동작에 사용하던 타겟 리모트 UE와 소스 리모트 UE를 식별하는 값 (예컨대, 상기 생성된 메시지가 타겟/소스 리모트 UE가 소스/타겟 리모트 UE에 전달하는 메시지로 취급될 수 있도록)으로 설정될 수 있다. 이는, 상기 소스 리모트 UE가 상기 릴레이 UE의 존재를 명확히 식별하지 못할 수 있기 때문이다 (소스 리모트 UE는 멀티 홉 연결들을 형성한 릴레이 UE들 모두를 제어하지 않을 수 있는바, 상기 릴레이 UE들 전부를 인식하지 못할 수 있음). 상기 릴레이 UE가 소스 리모트 UE에게 홉 연결에 대한 RLF를 보고하는 경우, 상기 릴레이 UE는 상기 RLF 보고를 위한 메시지에 상기 RLF가 감지된 홉/홉 연결이 몇 번째 홉인지 지시하는 정보를 더 포함시킬 수 있다. 즉, 멀티 홉 RLF의 보고를 위한 메시지는 RLF가 발생한 홉 넘버 (hop number) 또는 홉 카운트에 대한 값이 더 포함될 수 있다.The relay UE may generate a PC5-RRC message (e.g., a notification message) to report an RLF for the hop connection connected to it. The generated message may have an SRC (Source or Source UE)/DST (Destination or Destination UE) address of an adaptation layer set to a value identifying the target remote UE and the source remote UE used in the existing relay operation (e.g., so that the generated message can be treated as a message that the target/source remote UE delivers to the source/target remote UE). This is because the source remote UE may not clearly identify the existence of the relay UE (since the source remote UE may not control all of the relay UEs that formed the multi-hop connections, it may not be aware of all of the relay UEs). When the relay UE reports an RLF for a hop connection to the source remote UE, the relay UE may further include information indicating the hop number of the hop/hop connection in which the RLF was detected in the message for reporting the RLF. That is, the message for reporting a multi-hop RLF may further include a value for the hop number or hop count in which the RLF occurred.

(2) 경우 2(2) Case 2

릴레이 UE A는 자신과 연결된 홉 연결 (또는, 제1 홉 연결)에 대해 RLF를 감지하면, 다른 홉 연결 (또는, 제2 홉 연결)을 형성한 릴레이 UE B에게만 상기 RLF에 대한 정보 (예컨대, RLF 통지 메시지를 통해서)를 알릴 수도 있다. 이 경우, 릴레이 UE B 또는 릴레이 UE A는 제2 홉 연결을 해제하고, 자신과 연결된 다른 홉 연결 (또는, 제3 홉 연결)을 형성하는 릴레이 UE C에게 제1 홉 연결에 대한 RLF 감지 정보를 포함하는 RLF 통지 메시지를 전송할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 릴레이 UE B는 상기 RLF 통지 메시지를 전송하면서 상기 릴레이 UE C와의 제3 홉 연결을 해제할 수 있다. 상기 릴레이 UE B가 RLF 통지 메시지를 상기 릴레이 UE C에게 제공한 경우, 상기 릴레이 UE C는 릴레이 UE B와의 제3 홉 연결을 해제할 수 있다.When relay UE A detects an RLF for a 1-hop connection (or a 1st-hop connection) connected to itself, the relay UE A may notify information about the RLF (e.g., via an RLF notification message) only to relay UE B that has formed another hop connection (or a 2nd-hop connection). In this case, relay UE B or relay UE A may release the 2nd-hop connection and transmit an RLF notification message including RLF detection information for the 1st-hop connection to relay UE C that has formed another hop connection (or a 3rd-hop connection) connected to itself. At this time, the relay UE B may release the 3rd-hop connection with the relay UE C while transmitting the RLF notification message. If the relay UE B provides the RLF notification message to the relay UE C, the relay UE C may release the 3rd-hop connection with the relay UE B.

이와 같은 과정 (예컨대, 순차적인 RLF 통지 메시지의 전송 및 홉 연결의 해제 과정)은 소스 리모트 UE에게 상기 제1 홉 연결에 대한 RLF가 통지 될 때까지 (또는, 소스 리모트 UE와 첫 번째 홉 (1st-hop) 연결이 형성된 릴레이 UE가 상기 제1 홉 연결에 대한 RLF를 이유로 첫 번째 홉 (1st-hop) 연결을 해제할 때까지) 진행될 수 있다. 이 경우에도, 상기 RLF 통지 메시지는 몇 번째 홉에서 RLF가 발생했는지에 대한 정보를 더 포함할 수 있다.A process like this (e.g., sending of sequential RLF notification messages and releasing of hop connections) may be continued until the source remote UE is notified of an RLF for the 1st-hop connection (or, until a relay UE, with which a 1st-hop connection has been formed, releases the 1st-hop connection due to an RLF for the 1st-hop connection). In this case, the RLF notification message may further include information about at which hop the RLF occurred.

또는, 홉 연결에 대한 RLF를 감지한 릴레이 UE A는 자신과 다른 홉 연결을 형성한 릴레이 UE B와의 홉 연결도 해제하면서 상기 홉 연결의 해제의 원인 값 (cause value)이 RLF 임을 지시하는 해제 메시지를 상기 릴레이 UE B에게 전송할 수 있다. 상기 해제 메시지를 수신한 상기 릴레이 UE B는 자신과 연결되어 있는 또 다른 릴레이 UE(C)와의 홉 연결을 해제하면서 상기 홉 연결의 해제의 원인 값 (cause value)이 RLF 임을 지시하는 해제 메시지를 전송할 수 있다. 이 경우에도 상기 해제 메시지는 몇 번째 홉에서 RLF가 발생했는지에 대한 지시 정보가 더 포함될 수 있다.Alternatively, relay UE A, which detects an RLF for a hop connection, may transmit a release message to relay UE B, indicating that the cause value of the release of the hop connection is RLF, while also releasing the hop connection with relay UE B, which formed another hop connection with itself. Relay UE B, which receives the release message, may transmit a release message indicating that the cause value of the release of the hop connection is RLF while releasing the hop connection with another relay UE (C) connected to itself. In this case, the release message may further include indication information on which hop the RLF occurred.

(3) 경우 3(3) Case 3

소스 리모트 UE가 전체 홉 연결들을 제어/관리하고, 릴레이 UE와 릴레이 UE 간의 홉 연결에 RLF가 발생한 경우, 상기 RLF를 감지한 릴레이 UE는 자신의 ID (e.g., L2 ID (and/or) local ID) 및/또는 RLF가 발생한 홉 연결 (또는, 링크)을 형성했던 릴레이 UE ID (예컨대, L2 ID 및/또는 로컬 (local) ID)를 소스 리모트 UE에게 알릴 수 있다.When a source remote UE controls/manages all hop connections and an RLF occurs in a hop connection between relay UEs, the relay UE detecting the RLF may inform the source remote UE of its ID (e.g., L2 ID (and/or) local ID) and/or the relay UE ID (e.g., L2 ID and/or local ID) that formed the hop connection (or link) where the RLF occurred.

또는, 상술한 경우 1 및/또는 경우 2에서 RLF 통지 메시지 및/또는 RLF를 원인 값으로 하는 해제 메시지를 수신한 소스 리모트 UE는 릴레이 재-선택이 트리거링될 수 있다. 또는, RLF를 감지한 릴레이 UE와 다른 홉 연결을 형성한 다른 릴레이 UE 및/또는 소스 리모트 UE가 복수인 경우, 상기 릴레이 UE는 RLF 통지 메시지 및/또는 RLF를 원인 값으로 갖는 해제 메시지를 상기 복수의 다른 릴레이 UE들 및/또는 소스 리모트 UE들 모두에게 전송할 수 있다.Alternatively, a source remote UE that receives an RLF notification message and/or a release message having RLF as a cause value in case 1 and/or case 2 described above may trigger relay re-selection. Alternatively, if there are multiple other relay UEs and/or source remote UEs that have formed different hop connections with the relay UE that detected the RLF, the relay UE may transmit the RLF notification message and/or the release message having RLF as a cause value to all of the multiple other relay UEs and/or source remote UEs.

한편, 상술한 제안 방법은 소스 리모트 UE를 타겟 리모트 UE 또는 기지국으로 대체하여 적용되거나, 타겟 리모트 UE를 소스 리모트 UE 또는 기지국으로 대체하여 적용될 수 있다.Meanwhile, the above-described proposed method can be applied by replacing the source remote UE with a target remote UE or a base station, or by replacing the target remote UE with a source remote UE or a base station.

3. RLF 감지에 따른 릴레이 재선택의 트리거3. Triggering relay reselection based on RLF detection

RLF 감지 및/또는 보고에 따른 릴레이 재선택은 (source/타겟 리모트 UE가 아닌) 릴레이 UE에서 직접 트리거될 수도 있다. 즉, 멀티 홉 U2U 릴레이 동작을 수행하는 릴레이 UE는 자신과 형성된 홉 연결에 대한 RLF를 감지를 조건으로 릴레이 재-선택 동작이 트리거될 수 있다. 이 경우, 릴레이 UE는 하기와 같은 릴레이 재선택 동작을 수행할 수 있다.Relay reselection based on RLF detection and/or reporting may also be triggered directly at the relay UE (rather than at the source/target remote UE). That is, a relay UE performing multi-hop U2U relay operation may trigger relay reselection operation conditionally on detection of RLF for its established hop connection. In this case, the relay UE may perform the following relay reselection operation:

(1) 경우 1(1) Case 1

릴레이 UE는 상술한 바와 같이 홉 연결에 대한 RLF를 감지한 경우에 디스커버리 메시지를 브로드캐스트할 수 있다. 이때, 디스커버리 메시지의 소스 주소는 자신의 주소가 아닌 소스 리모트 UE (예컨대, 상기 홉 연결을 통해 데이터 전송하는 리모트 UE)를 식별하기 위한 주소 (즉, L2 address, local/temporal address)로 설정될 수 있다. 상기 디스커버리 메시지의 목적 주소 (destination address)는 타겟 리모트 UE를 식별하기 위한 주소로 설정될 수 있다. 또는, 상기 릴레이 UE가 RLF가 감지된 홉 연결을 형성한 다른 릴레이 UE의 선택에 이용된 소스 리모트 UE의 디스커버리 메시지 (미리 저장된)를 이용하여 릴레이 재선택을 위한 디스커버리 메시지를 전송할 수 있다. The relay UE may broadcast a discovery message when it detects an RLF for a hop connection as described above. At this time, a source address of the discovery message may be set to an address (i.e., an L2 address, a local/temporal address) for identifying a source remote UE (e.g., a remote UE transmitting data through the hop connection) other than its own address. A destination address of the discovery message may be set to an address for identifying a target remote UE. Alternatively, the relay UE may transmit a discovery message for relay reselection by using a discovery message (pre-stored) of a source remote UE that is used for selecting another relay UE that formed the hop connection for which an RLF was detected.

멀티 홉 U2U 릴레이 동작에서 릴레이 UE가 릴레이 재선택의 트리거로 새로운 릴레이 UE와 홉 연결 (또는, SL connection)을 형성한 경우, 릴레이 UE는 새로운 릴레이 UE와의 홉 연결을 소스 리모트 UE에게 보고할 수도 있다. 또는, 릴레이 UE가 새로운 릴레이 UE를 재선택에 따른 홉 연결로 이전 RLF 발생 전에 대비하여 전체 홉의 수가 증가된 경우(또는, 경우에만), 상기 릴레이 UE는 새로운 릴레이 UE의 재선택에 대한 정보를 소스 리모트 UE에게 보고해야 할 수도 있다.In a multi-hop U2U relay operation, if a relay UE forms a hop connection (or SL connection) with a new relay UE as a trigger of relay reselection, the relay UE may report the hop connection with the new relay UE to the source remote UE. Alternatively, if (or only if) the total number of hops increased by the relay UE due to the hop connection resulting from reselection of the new relay UE compared to before the previous RLF occurrence, the relay UE may need to report information about the reselection of the new relay UE to the source remote UE.

릴레이 UE가 홉 연결에 대한 RLF의 감지로 릴레이 재선택을 트리거한 경우, 릴레이 UE는 새롭게 정의된 타이머를 작동/시작할 수 있다. 상기 릴레이 UE는 새로운 릴레이 UE가 탐색된 경우에 타겟 리모트 UE까지의 연결이 복구/재형성되면 상기 타이머의 작동을 중단/중지시킬 수 있다. 타이머가 만료될 때까지 새로운 릴레이 UE가 탐색되지 않은 경우, 상기 릴레이 UE는 RLF의 감지에 대한 정보 (또는, 릴레이 재선택 실패에 대한 정보)를 소스 리모트 UE 및/또는 자신과 연결된 다른 릴레이 UE에게 보고할 수 있다. 이와 같은 정보를 수신한 다른 릴레이 UE 및/또는 소스 리모트 UE는 자신의 홉 연결을 해제하거나, 릴레이 재선택을 트리거 할 수 있다.When a relay UE triggers relay reselection by detection of RLF for a hop connection, the relay UE may start/start a newly defined timer. The relay UE may stop/suspend the timer when the connection to the target remote UE is restored/reestablished if a new relay UE is discovered. When the timer expires and no new relay UE is discovered by the timer expires, the relay UE may report information about the detection of RLF (or information about relay reselection failure) to the source remote UE and/or other relay UEs connected to it. The other relay UEs and/or the source remote UEs that receive such information may release their hop connections or trigger relay reselection.

또는, 상기 멀티 홉 릴레이 동작에서 릴레이 UE가 릴레이 재선택을 트리거하는 방식은 소스 리모트 UE (또는, 타겟 리모트 UE)와 직접 홉 연결을 형성한 릴레이 UE에 대해선 적용되지 않을 수 있다. 예컨대, 소스 리모트 UE (또는, 타겟 리모트 UE)와 직접 홉 연결을 형성한 릴레이 UE 대신 소스 리모트 UE (또는, 타겟 리모트 UE)가 직접 릴레이 재선택을 수행함이 보다 적절할 수 있다.Alternatively, the manner in which the relay UE triggers relay reselection in the multi-hop relay operation may not be applied to a relay UE that has formed a direct hop connection with the source remote UE (or the target remote UE). For example, it may be more appropriate for the source remote UE (or the target remote UE) to directly perform relay reselection instead of the relay UE that has formed a direct hop connection with the source remote UE (or the target remote UE).

이와 같이, 제안 발명은 홉 연결에 대한 RLF 발생 한 경우에 RLF 발생을 감지한 릴레이 UE가 직접 릴레이 재선택을 수행함으로써 RLF 발생한 중간 홉 연결을 신속하게 복구할 수 있다.In this way, the proposed invention can quickly recover an intermediate hop connection in which an RLF has occurred by having a relay UE detect an RLF occurrence directly perform relay reselection when an RLF has occurred for the hop connection.

한편, 상술한 바와 같이, 상술한 제안 내용은 멀티 홉에 기반한 U2U 릴레이뿐만 아니라 U2N 릴레이에 대해서도 적용될 수 있다. 이 경우, 상술한 제안 내용은, 상술한 소스 리모트 UE 또는 타겟 리모트 UE를 기지국 (gNB)으로 대체할 경우에 멀티 홉 U2N 릴레이에 대한 동작에서도 적용될 수 있음이 당연하다.Meanwhile, as described above, the above-described proposal can be applied not only to a multi-hop based U2U relay but also to a U2N relay. In this case, it is obvious that the above-described proposal can also be applied to the operation for a multi-hop U2N relay when the above-described source remote UE or target remote UE is replaced with a base station (gNB).

도 18은 제1 릴레이 단말이 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 수행하는 방법을 설명하기 위한 도면이다.Figure 18 is a diagram for explaining how a first relay terminal performs multi-hop based relay.

도 18을 참조하면, 제1 릴레이 단말은 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 위한 제1 홉 연결과 제2 홉 연결을 형성 또는 수립할 수 있다 (S181). 여기서, 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이는 적어도 둘 이상의 릴레이들을 통해 제1 장치와 제2 장치 간을 연결시키는 릴레이 통신으로써, 상기 제1 장치는 리모트 단말 (또는, 소스 리모트 단말)이거나 네트워크일 수 있고, 상기 제2 장치는 리모트 단말 (또는, 타겟 리모트 단말, 또는 네트워크)일 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이는 리모트 단말과 네트워크 간의 데이터의 송수신을 위한 멀티 홉 기반 U2N 릴레이이거나, 소스 리모트 단말과 타겟 리모트 단말 간의 데이터의 송수신을 위한 멀티 홉 기반 U2U 릴레이일 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 18, the first relay terminal can form or establish a first hop connection and a second hop connection for a multi-hop based relay (S181). Here, the multi-hop based relay is a relay communication that connects a first device and a second device through at least two relays, and the first device may be a remote terminal (or a source remote terminal) or a network, and the second device may be a remote terminal (or a target remote terminal, or a network). For example, the multi-hop based relay may be a multi-hop based U2N relay for transmitting and receiving data between a remote terminal and a network, or a multi-hop based U2U relay for transmitting and receiving data between a source remote terminal and a target remote terminal.

구체적으로, 제1 릴레이 단말은 디스커버리 절차를 통해 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 위한 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결을 형성할 수 있다. 여기서, 상기 제1 홉 연결은 상기 제1 장치와 연결 (PC5 연결 또는 Uu 연결) 이거나, 다른 릴레이 단말과의 연결 (PC5 연결)일 수 있고, 상기 제2 홉 연결은 상기 제2 장치와 연결 (PC5 연결 또는 Uu 연결)이거나, 또 다른 릴레이 단말과의 연결 (PC5 연결)일 수 있다. 또는, 도 13 또는 도 14에서 설명한 바와 같이, 상기 제1 릴레이 단말은 상기 제1 장치, 제2 장치 및/또는 다른 릴레이 단말과의 RRC 메시지 (또는, PC5 RRC 메시지)를 통해 각 홉 연결에 대한 설정, 및 상기 제1 장치와 제2 장치 간의 연결 (또는, end-to-end 연결)에 대한 설정을 수행할 수 있다. Specifically, the first relay terminal can form the first hop connection and the second hop connection for the multi-hop based relay through a discovery procedure. Here, the first hop connection can be a connection with the first device (PC5 connection or Uu connection) or a connection with another relay terminal (PC5 connection), and the second hop connection can be a connection with the second device (PC5 connection or Uu connection) or a connection with another relay terminal (PC5 connection). Or, as described in FIG. 13 or FIG. 14, the first relay terminal can perform configuration for each hop connection, and configuration for the connection (or end-to-end connection) between the first device and the second device through an RRC message (or PC5 RRC message) with the first device, the second device, and/or the other relay terminal.

다음으로, 제1 릴레이 단말은 제1 홉 연결 또는 제2 홉 연결에 대한 RLF (Radio Link Failure) 감지 여부를 모니터링할 수 있다 (S183). 제1 릴레이 단말은 제1 홉 연결 및/또는 제2 홉 연결에 대한 신호 품질 (RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) 또는 RSRP (Reference Signal Received Quality))을 측정하고, 상기 신호 품질이 미리 설정된 임계 시간 동안 특정 임계 미만인 경우에 RLF가 발생 또는 감지된 것으로 결정 또는 선언할 수 있다.Next, the first relay terminal can monitor whether a Radio Link Failure (RLF) is detected for the first-hop connection or the second-hop connection (S183). The first relay terminal can measure a signal quality (Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP) or Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRP)) for the first-hop connection and/or the second-hop connection, and determine or declare that an RLF has occurred or detected if the signal quality is below a specific threshold for a preset threshold time.

다음으로, 제1 릴레이 단말은 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결 중 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 RLF가 감지된 경우에 상기 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 릴레이 단말의 재선택을 위한 절차를 수행할 수 있다 (S185). 예컨대, 상기 제2 홉 연결에 대한 RLF가 감지된 경우, 상기 제1 릴레이 단말은 상기 제1 홉 연결을 통한 상기 RLF 감지에 대한 보고 없이 상기 제2 홉 연결을 위한 새로운 릴레이 단말을 선택하기 위한 릴레이 재선택 절차를 수행할 수 있다. 한편, 상기 릴레이 통신이 하나의 릴레이 단말을 통해 수행되는 경우에는 상기 릴레이 단말은 상기 RLF 감지에 대한 정보를 소스 장치 (또는, 타겟 장치)에게 보고할 뿐 직접 릴레이 재선택 절차를 수행하지 않는다. Next, the first relay terminal may perform a procedure for reselecting a relay terminal for one of the first hop connection and the second hop connection when an RLF for the one hop connection is detected (S185). For example, when an RLF for the second hop connection is detected, the first relay terminal may perform a relay reselection procedure for selecting a new relay terminal for the second hop connection without reporting on the RLF detection through the first hop connection. Meanwhile, when the relay communication is performed through one relay terminal, the relay terminal only reports information on the RLF detection to the source device (or, target device) and does not directly perform the relay reselection procedure.

RLF가 감지된 상기 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 릴레이 재선택 절차는 디스커버리 절차를 통해 수행될 수 있다. 구체적으로, 상기 제1 릴레이 단말은 미리 설정된 시간 내에 디스커버리 절차를 통해 상기 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 새로운 릴레이 단말이 발견/탐색된 경우에 상기 새로운 릴레이 단말과 상기 하나의 홉 연결을 재형성하기 위한 절차를 수행할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 제1 릴레이 단말은 상기 제1 장치 또는 상기 제2 장치에게 상기 새로운 릴레이 단말과 상기 하나의 홉 연결을 재형성한 것에 대한 정보를 보고할 수 있다. 또는, 상기 제1 릴레이 단말은 상기 새로운 릴레이 단말과 상기 하나의 홉 연결의 재형성으로 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이에 대한 전체 홉 수가 증가된 경우에만 상기 제1 장치 또는 상기 제2 장치에게 상기 하나의 홉 연결의 재형성에 대한 정보를 보고할 수 있다.The relay reselection procedure for the one-hop connection in which the RLF is detected may be performed through a discovery procedure. Specifically, the first relay terminal may perform a procedure for re-establishing the one-hop connection with the new relay terminal if a new relay terminal for the one-hop connection is discovered/searched through the discovery procedure within a preset time. At this time, the first relay terminal may report information about the re-establishment of the one-hop connection with the new relay terminal to the first device or the second device. Alternatively, the first relay terminal may report information about the re-establishment of the one-hop connection to the first device or the second device only when the total number of hops for the multi-hop based relay increases due to the re-establishment of the one-hop connection with the new relay terminal.

또는, 미리 설정된 시간 내에 디스커버리 절차를 통해 상기 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 새로운 릴레이 단말이 발견/탐색되지 않은 경우, 상기 제1 릴레이 단말은 상기 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 RLF 감지 정보 (또는, 릴레이 재선택의 실패에 대한 정보)를 보고할 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 제2 홉 연결에 대한 RLF가 감지되어 제2 홉 연결에 대한 디스커버리 절차를 수행하였으나 새로운 릴레이 단말이 발견되지 않은 경우, 상기 제1 릴레이 단말은 상기 제1 홉 연결을 통해 상기 제1 장치 (및/또는 제1 홉 연결을 통해 상기 제1 장치와 연결된 다른 릴레이 단말)에게 상기 제2 홉 연결의 RLF 감지 정보를 보고할 수 있다. 이 경우, 상기 RLF 감지 정보는 상기 제2 홉 연결에 대한 홉 넘버의 값을 더 포함할 수 있다. 또는, 상기 RLF 감지 정보는 상기 홉 연결을 해제하기 위해 정의된 해제 메시지를 통해 보고될 수 있고, 상기 해제 메시지는 상기 제1 홉 연결에 대해 RLF가 감지되지 않았더라도 RLF 감지의 원인 값이 설정될 수 있다. 이때, 상기 제1 릴레이 UE와 제1 홉 연결을 형성한 다른 릴레이 단말은 상기 RLF 감지 정보를 상기 제1 장치에게 보고하면서 상기 제1 홉 연결 및/또는 나머지 홉 연결에 대한 해제 절차를 수행할 수 있다. 한편, 상술한 미리 설정된 시간은 릴레이 단말이 직접 수행하는 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차를 위해 새롭게 정의된 타이머의 작동 시간일 수 있다. 상기 타이머는 상기 제2 홉 연결에 대한 RLF의 감지 또는 상기 릴레이 재선택 절차가 트리거된 경우에 작동할 수 있고, 새로운 릴레이 단말의 탐색 없이 상기 미리 설정된 시간이 경과하면 만료될 수 있다. 상기 타이머는 상기 릴레이 재선택 절차를 통해 새로운 릴레이 단말이 탐색/발견된 경우에는 작동이 중단/중지될 수 있다.Alternatively, if a new relay terminal for the one hop connection is not discovered/searched through the discovery procedure within a preset time, the first relay terminal may report RLF detection information (or information on failure of relay reselection) for the one hop connection. For example, if an RLF for the second hop connection is detected and a discovery procedure for the second hop connection is performed but a new relay terminal is not discovered, the first relay terminal may report RLF detection information for the second hop connection to the first device (and/or another relay terminal connected to the first device through the first hop connection) through the first hop connection. In this case, the RLF detection information may further include a value of a hop number for the second hop connection. Alternatively, the RLF detection information may be reported through a release message defined to release the hop connection, and the release message may be set to a cause value of RLF detection even if an RLF is not detected for the first hop connection. At this time, the other relay terminals that formed the first hop connection with the first relay UE may perform a release procedure for the first hop connection and/or the remaining hop connections while reporting the RLF detection information to the first device. Meanwhile, the preset time described above may be an operation time of a timer newly defined for a reselection procedure of the relay terminal that the relay terminal directly performs. The timer may operate when an RLF for the second hop connection is detected or the relay reselection procedure is triggered, and may expire when the preset time elapses without searching for a new relay terminal. The timer may be stopped/suspended when a new relay terminal is searched/discovered through the relay reselection procedure.

또는, 상기 제2 홉 연결에 대한 RLF가 감지되고, 상기 제1 홉 연결이 릴레이 단말이 아닌 제1 장치 (소스 리모트 단말 또는 네트워크)와 연결된 경우, 상기 제1 릴레이 단말은 상기 제2 홉 연결에 대한 릴레이 재선택 절차를 수행하지 않을 수 있다. 이 경우, 상기 제1 릴레이 단말은 상기 릴레이 재선택 절차의 수행 없이 상기 제1 장치에게 상기 제2 홉 연결에 대한 RLF 감지 정보를 보고할 수 있다. 여기서, RLF 감지 정보는 상술한 바와 같이 해제 메시지를 통해 전달될 수 있다. 이 경우, 상기 해제 메시지의 순차적인 보고/전달과 함께 상기 멀티 홉 릴레이를 위해 연결된 홉 연결들이 순차적으로 해제될 수 있다.Alternatively, if an RLF for the second hop connection is detected and the first hop connection is connected to a first device (source remote terminal or network) that is not a relay terminal, the first relay terminal may not perform a relay reselection procedure for the second hop connection. In this case, the first relay terminal may report RLF detection information for the second hop connection to the first device without performing the relay reselection procedure. Here, the RLF detection information may be delivered via a release message as described above. In this case, hop connections connected for the multi-hop relay may be sequentially released together with the sequential reporting/delivery of the release messages.

이와 같이, 제안 발명은 RLF가 감지된 홉 연결에 대한 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차를 릴레이 단말이 직접 수행함으로써, 복수의 홉 연결들에 기반한 릴레이 통신에서도 RLF가 감지된 홉 연결을 신속하게 복구할 수 있다. 또는, 제안 발명은 RLF 감지 정보가 복수의 홉 연결들을 통해 순차적으로 보고에서 홉 연결에 대한 해제도 순차적으로 수행함으로써, RLF가 감지된 홉 연결과 관련된 나머지 홉 연결을 신속하게 해제시킬 수 있다.In this way, the proposed invention can quickly recover a hop connection in which an RLF is detected even in relay communication based on multiple hop connections by having the relay terminal directly perform a reselection procedure for the hop connection in which an RLF is detected. Alternatively, the proposed invention can quickly release the remaining hop connections related to the hop connection in which an RLF is detected by sequentially reporting RLF detection information through multiple hop connections and also sequentially performing release for the hop connections.

발명이 적용되는 통신 시스템 예Examples of communication systems to which the invention applies

이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 본 문서에 개시된 본 발명의 다양한 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 기기들간에 무선 통신/연결(예, 5G)을 필요로 하는 다양한 분야에 적용될 수 있다.Although not limited thereto, the various descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flowcharts of the present invention disclosed in this document may be applied to various fields requiring wireless communication/connectivity (e.g., 5G) between devices.

이하, 도면을 참조하여 보다 구체적으로 예시한다. 이하의 도면/설명에서 동일한 도면 부호는 다르게 기술하지 않는 한, 동일하거나 대응되는 하드웨어 블록, 소프트웨어 블록 또는 기능 블록을 예시할 수 있다. Hereinafter, more specific examples will be provided with reference to the drawings. In the drawings/descriptions below, the same drawing symbols may illustrate identical or corresponding hardware blocks, software blocks, or functional blocks, unless otherwise described.

도 19은 본 발명에 적용되는 통신 시스템을 예시한다.Figure 19 illustrates a communication system applied to the present invention.

도 19를 참조하면, 본 발명에 적용되는 통신 시스템(1)은 무선 기기, 기지국 및 네트워크를 포함한다. 여기서, 무선 기기는 무선 접속 기술(예, 5G NR(New RAT), LTE(Long Term Evolution))을 이용하여 통신을 수행하는 기기를 의미하며, 통신/무선/5G 기기로 지칭될 수 있다. 이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 무선 기기는 로봇(100a), 차량(100b-1, 100b-2), XR(eXtended Reality) 기기(100c), 휴대 기기(Hand-held device)(100d), 가전(100e), IoT(Internet of Thing) 기기(100f), AI기기/서버(400)를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 차량은 무선 통신 기능이 구비된 차량, 자율 주행 차량, 차량간 통신을 수행할 수 있는 차량 등을 포함할 수 있다. 여기서, 차량은 UAV(Unmanned Aerial Vehicle)(예, 드론)를 포함할 수 있다. XR 기기는 AR(Augmented Reality)/VR(Virtual Reality)/MR(Mixed Reality) 기기를 포함하며, HMD(Head-Mounted Device), 차량에 구비된 HUD(Head-Up Display), 텔레비전, 스마트폰, 컴퓨터, 웨어러블 디바이스, 가전 기기, 디지털 사이니지(signage), 차량, 로봇 등의 형태로 구현될 수 있다. 휴대 기기는 스마트폰, 스마트패드, 웨어러블 기기(예, 스마트워치, 스마트글래스), 컴퓨터(예, 노트북 등) 등을 포함할 수 있다. 가전은 TV, 냉장고, 세탁기 등을 포함할 수 있다. IoT 기기는 센서, 스마트미터 등을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 기지국, 네트워크는 무선 기기로도 구현될 수 있으며, 특정 무선 기기(200a)는 다른 무선 기기에게 기지국/네트워크 노드로 동작할 수도 있다.Referring to FIG. 19, a communication system (1) applied to the present invention includes a wireless device, a base station, and a network. Here, the wireless device means a device that performs communication using a wireless access technology (e.g., 5G NR (New RAT), LTE (Long Term Evolution)) and may be referred to as a communication/wireless/5G device. Although not limited thereto, the wireless device may include a robot (100a), a vehicle (100b-1, 100b-2), an XR (eXtended Reality) device (100c), a hand-held device (100d), a home appliance (100e), an IoT (Internet of Thing) device (100f), and an AI device/server (400). For example, the vehicle may include a vehicle equipped with a wireless communication function, an autonomous vehicle, a vehicle capable of performing vehicle-to-vehicle communication, etc. Here, the vehicle may include a UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) (e.g., a drone). XR devices include AR (Augmented Reality)/VR (Virtual Reality)/MR (Mixed Reality) devices and can be implemented in the form of HMD (Head-Mounted Device), HUD (Head-Up Display) installed in a vehicle, television, smartphone, computer, wearable device, home appliance, digital signage, vehicle, robot, etc. Portable devices can include smartphone, smart pad, wearable device (e.g., smart watch, smart glass), computer (e.g., laptop, etc.). Home appliances can include TV, refrigerator, washing machine, etc. IoT devices can include sensors, smart meters, etc. For example, base stations and networks can also be implemented as wireless devices, and a specific wireless device (200a) can act as a base station/network node to other wireless devices.

무선 기기(100a~100f)는 기지국(200)을 통해 네트워크(300)와 연결될 수 있다. 무선 기기(100a~100f)에는 AI(Artificial Intelligence) 기술이 적용될 수 있으며, 무선 기기(100a~100f)는 네트워크(300)를 통해 AI 서버(400)와 연결될 수 있다. 네트워크(300)는 3G 네트워크, 4G(예, LTE) 네트워크 또는 5G(예, NR) 네트워크 등을 이용하여 구성될 수 있다. 무선 기기(100a~100f)는 기지국(200)/네트워크(300)를 통해 서로 통신할 수도 있지만, 기지국/네트워크를 통하지 않고 직접 통신(e.g. 사이드링크 통신(sidelink communication))할 수도 있다. 예를 들어, 차량들(100b-1, 100b-2)은 직접 통신(e.g. V2V(Vehicle to Vehicle)/V2X(Vehicle to everything) communication)을 할 수 있다. 또한, IoT 기기(예, 센서)는 다른 IoT 기기(예, 센서) 또는 다른 무선 기기(100a~100f)와 직접 통신을 할 수 있다.Wireless devices (100a to 100f) can be connected to a network (300) via a base station (200). Artificial Intelligence (AI) technology can be applied to the wireless devices (100a to 100f), and the wireless devices (100a to 100f) can be connected to an AI server (400) via the network (300). The network (300) can be configured using a 3G network, a 4G (e.g., LTE) network, a 5G (e.g., NR) network, etc. The wireless devices (100a to 100f) can communicate with each other via the base station (200)/network (300), but can also communicate directly (e.g., sidelink communication) without going through the base station/network. For example, vehicles (100b-1, 100b-2) can communicate directly (e.g. V2V (Vehicle to Vehicle)/V2X (Vehicle to everything) communication). Also, IoT devices (e.g., sensors) can communicate directly with other IoT devices (e.g., sensors) or other wireless devices (100a to 100f).

무선 기기(100a~100f)/기지국(200), 기지국(200)/기지국(200) 간에는 무선 통신/연결(150a, 150b, 150c)이 이뤄질 수 있다. 여기서, 무선 통신/연결은 상향/하향링크 통신(150a)과 사이드링크 통신(150b)(또는, D2D 통신), 기지국간 통신(150c)(e.g. relay, IAB(Integrated Access Backhaul)과 같은 다양한 무선 접속 기술(예, 5G NR)을 통해 이뤄질 수 있다. 무선 통신/연결(150a, 150b, 150c)을 통해 무선 기기와 기지국/무선 기기, 기지국과 기지국은 서로 무선 신호를 송신/수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 무선 통신/연결(150a, 150b, 150c)은 다양한 물리 채널을 통해 신호를 송신/수신할 수 있다. 이를 위해, 본 발명의 다양한 제안들에 기반하여, 무선 신호의 송신/수신을 위한 다양한 구성정보 설정 과정, 다양한 신호 처리 과정(예, 채널 인코딩/디코딩, 변조/복조, 자원 매핑/디매핑 등), 자원 할당 과정 등 중 적어도 일부가 수행될 수 있다.Wireless communication/connection (150a, 150b, 150c) can be established between wireless devices (100a to 100f)/base stations (200), and base stations (200)/base stations (200). Here, the wireless communication/connection can be achieved through various wireless access technologies (e.g., 5G NR) such as uplink/downlink communication (150a), sidelink communication (150b) (or, D2D communication), and communication between base stations (150c) (e.g., relay, IAB (Integrated Access Backhaul). Through the wireless communication/connection (150a, 150b, 150c), a wireless device and a base station/wireless device, and a base station and a base station can transmit/receive wireless signals to/from each other. For example, the wireless communication/connection (150a, 150b, 150c) can transmit/receive signals through various physical channels. To this end, at least some of various configuration information setting processes for transmitting/receiving wireless signals, various signal processing processes (e.g., channel encoding/decoding, modulation/demodulation, resource mapping/demapping, etc.), and resource allocation processes can be performed based on various proposals of the present invention.

본 발명이 적용되는 무선 기기 예Examples of wireless devices to which the present invention is applied

도 20은 본 발명에 적용될 수 있는 무선 기기를 예시한다.Figure 20 illustrates a wireless device that can be applied to the present invention.

도 20을 참조하면, 제1 무선 기기(100)와 제2 무선 기기(200)는 다양한 무선 접속 기술(예, LTE, NR)을 통해 무선 신호를 송수신할 수 있다. 여기서, {제1 무선 기기(100), 제2 무선 기기(200)}은 도 19의 {무선 기기(100x), 기지국(200)} 및/또는 {무선 기기(100x), 무선 기기(100x)}에 대응할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 20, the first wireless device (100) and the second wireless device (200) can transmit and receive wireless signals through various wireless access technologies (e.g., LTE, NR). Here, {the first wireless device (100), the second wireless device (200)} can correspond to {the wireless device (100x), the base station (200)} and/or {the wireless device (100x), the wireless device (100x)} of FIG. 19.

제1 무선 기기(100)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102) 및 하나 이상의 메모리(104)를 포함하며, 추가적으로 하나 이상의 송수신기(106) 및/또는 하나 이상의 안테나(108)을 더 포함할 수 있다. 프로세서(102)는 메모리(104) 및/또는 송수신기(106)를 제어하며, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 구현하도록 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 프로세서(102)는 메모리(104) 내의 정보를 처리하여 제1 정보/신호를 생성한 뒤, 송수신기(106)을 통해 제1 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 전송할 수 있다. 또한, 프로세서(102)는 송수신기(106)를 통해 제2 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 수신한 뒤, 제2 정보/신호의 신호 처리로부터 얻은 정보를 메모리(104)에 저장할 수 있다. 메모리(104)는 프로세서(102)와 연결될 수 있고, 프로세서(102)의 동작과 관련한 다양한 정보를 저장할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 메모리(104)는 프로세서(102)에 의해 제어되는 프로세스들 중 일부 또는 전부를 수행하거나, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 수행하기 위한 명령들을 포함하는 소프트웨어 코드를 저장할 수 있다. 여기서, 프로세서(102)와 메모리(104)는 무선 통신 기술(예, LTE, NR)을 구현하도록 설계된 통신 모뎀/회로/칩셋의 일부일 수 있다. 송수신기(106)는 프로세서(102)와 연결될 수 있고, 하나 이상의 안테나(108)를 통해 무선 신호를 송신 및/또는 수신할 수 있다. 송수신기(106)는 송신기 및/또는 수신기를 포함할 수 있다. 송수신기(106)는 RF(Radio Frequency) 유닛과 혼용될 수 있다. 본 발명에서 무선 기기는 통신 모뎀/회로/칩셋을 의미할 수도 있다.A first wireless device (100) includes one or more processors (102) and one or more memories (104), and may additionally include one or more transceivers (106) and/or one or more antennas (108). The processor (102) controls the memory (104) and/or the transceiver (106), and may be configured to implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. For example, the processor (102) may process information in the memory (104) to generate first information/signal, and then transmit a wireless signal including the first information/signal via the transceiver (106). Additionally, the processor (102) may receive a wireless signal including second information/signal via the transceiver (106), and then store information obtained from signal processing of the second information/signal in the memory (104). The memory (104) may be connected to the processor (102) and may store various information related to the operation of the processor (102). For example, the memory (104) may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor (102), or may store software codes including instructions for performing the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. Here, the processor (102) and the memory (104) may be part of a communication modem/circuit/chipset designed to implement wireless communication technology (e.g., LTE, NR). The transceiver (106) may be connected to the processor (102) and may transmit and/or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas (108). The transceiver (106) may include a transmitter and/or a receiver. The transceiver (106) may be used interchangeably with an RF (Radio Frequency) unit. In the present invention, a wireless device may also mean a communication modem/circuit/chipset.

구체적으로, 제1 무선 기기 또는 단말은 (100)는 송수신기 (106)와 연결되는 프로세서 (102)와 메모리(104)를 포함할 수 있다. 메모리(104)는 "멀티 홉 릴레이 동작을 위한 릴레이 (재)선택 방법" 및 도 18에서 설명된 실시예들과 관련된 동작을 수행할 수 있는 적어도 하나의 프로그램들이 포함될 수 있다.Specifically, the first wireless device or terminal (100) may include a processor (102) and a memory (104) connected to a transceiver (106). The memory (104) may include at least one program capable of performing operations related to the “Method for (Re)selection of Relays for Multi-Hop Relay Operation” and the embodiments described in FIG. 18.

프로세서(102)는 송수신기 (106)를 제어하여 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 위한 제1 홉 연결 및 제2 홉 연결을 형성하고, 상기 제1 홉 연결 또는 상기 제2 홉 연결에 대한 RLF (Radio Link Failure) 발생 여부를 모니터링하며, 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결 중 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 RLF가 발생한 것에 기초하여, 상기 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차를 트리거할 수 있다.The processor (102) controls the transceiver (106) to form a first hop connection and a second hop connection for the multi-hop based relay, monitors whether an RLF (Radio Link Failure) occurs for the first hop connection or the second hop connection, and triggers a reselection procedure of a relay terminal for one of the first hop connection and the second hop connection based on the occurrence of an RLF for the one hop connection.

또는, 프로세서 (102) 및 메모리(104)를 포함하는 프로세싱 장치가 구성될 수 있다. 이 경우, 적어도 하나의 프로세서; 및 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 연결되고 명령어들을 저장하는 적어도 하나의 메모리를 포함하되, 상기 명령어들은 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 의해 실행되는 것을 기반으로 상기 제1 릴레이 단말로 하여금: 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 위한 제1 홉 연결 및 제2 홉 연결을 형성하고, 상기 제1 홉 연결 또는 상기 제2 홉 연결에 대한 RLF (Radio Link Failure) 발생 여부를 모니터링하며, 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결 중 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 RLF가 발생한 것에 기초하여, 상기 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차를 트리거하게 할 수 있다.Alternatively, a processing device including a processor (102) and a memory (104) may be configured. In this case, at least one processor; and at least one memory connected to the at least one processor and storing instructions, wherein the instructions, based on being executed by the at least one processor, cause the first relay terminal to: form a first hop connection and a second hop connection for the multi-hop based relay, monitor whether an RLF (Radio Link Failure) occurs for the first hop connection or the second hop connection, and trigger a reselection procedure of the relay terminal for the one hop connection based on the occurrence of an RLF for one of the first hop connection and the second hop connection.

제2 무선 기기(200)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(202), 하나 이상의 메모리(204)를 포함하며, 추가적으로 하나 이상의 송수신기(206) 및/또는 하나 이상의 안테나(208)를 더 포함할 수 있다. 프로세서(202)는 메모리(204) 및/또는 송수신기(206)를 제어하며, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 구현하도록 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 프로세서(202)는 메모리(204) 내의 정보를 처리하여 제3 정보/신호를 생성한 뒤, 송수신기(206)를 통해 제3 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 전송할 수 있다. 또한, 프로세서(202)는 송수신기(206)를 통해 제4 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 수신한 뒤, 제4 정보/신호의 신호 처리로부터 얻은 정보를 메모리(204)에 저장할 수 있다. 메모리(204)는 프로세서(202)와 연결될 수 있고, 프로세서(202)의 동작과 관련한 다양한 정보를 저장할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 메모리(204)는 프로세서(202)에 의해 제어되는 프로세스들 중 일부 또는 전부를 수행하거나, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 수행하기 위한 명령들을 포함하는 소프트웨어 코드를 저장할 수 있다. 여기서, 프로세서(202)와 메모리(204)는 무선 통신 기술(예, LTE, NR)을 구현하도록 설계된 통신 모뎀/회로/칩의 일부일 수 있다. 송수신기(206)는 프로세서(202)와 연결될 수 있고, 하나 이상의 안테나(208)를 통해 무선 신호를 송신 및/또는 수신할 수 있다. 송수신기(206)는 송신기 및/또는 수신기를 포함할 수 있다 송수신기(206)는 RF 유닛과 혼용될 수 있다. 본 발명에서 무선 기기는 통신 모뎀/회로/칩을 의미할 수도 있다.The second wireless device (200) includes one or more processors (202), one or more memories (204), and may additionally include one or more transceivers (206) and/or one or more antennas (208). The processor (202) may be configured to control the memories (204) and/or the transceivers (206), and implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. For example, the processor (202) may process information in the memory (204) to generate third information/signals, and then transmit a wireless signal including the third information/signals via the transceivers (206). Additionally, the processor (202) may receive a wireless signal including fourth information/signals via the transceivers (206), and then store information obtained from signal processing of the fourth information/signals in the memory (204). The memory (204) may be connected to the processor (202) and may store various information related to the operation of the processor (202). For example, the memory (204) may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor (202), or may store software codes including commands for performing the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. Here, the processor (202) and the memory (204) may be part of a communication modem/circuit/chip designed to implement wireless communication technology (e.g., LTE, NR). The transceiver (206) may be connected to the processor (202) and may transmit and/or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas (208). The transceiver (206) may include a transmitter and/or a receiver. The transceiver (206) may be used interchangeably with an RF unit. In the present invention, a wireless device may also mean a communication modem/circuit/chip.

이하, 무선 기기(100, 200)의 하드웨어 요소에 대해 보다 구체적으로 설명한다. 이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 하나 이상의 프로토콜 계층이 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 의해 구현될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 계층(예, PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, SDAP와 같은 기능적 계층)을 구현할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들에 따라 하나 이상의 PDU(Protocol Data Unit) 및/또는 하나 이상의 SDU(Service Data Unit)를 생성할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들에 따라 메시지, 제어정보, 데이터 또는 정보를 생성할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 본 문서에 개시된 기능, 절차, 제안 및/또는 방법에 따라 PDU, SDU, 메시지, 제어정보, 데이터 또는 정보를 포함하는 신호(예, 베이스밴드 신호)를 생성하여, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)에게 제공할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)로부터 신호(예, 베이스밴드 신호)를 수신할 수 있고, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들에 따라 PDU, SDU, 메시지, 제어정보, 데이터 또는 정보를 획득할 수 있다.Hereinafter, hardware elements of the wireless device (100, 200) will be described in more detail. Although not limited thereto, one or more protocol layers may be implemented by one or more processors (102, 202). For example, one or more processors (102, 202) may implement one or more layers (e.g., functional layers such as PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, SDAP). One or more processors (102, 202) may generate one or more Protocol Data Units (PDUs) and/or one or more Service Data Units (SDUs) according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. One or more processors (102, 202) may generate messages, control information, data, or information according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. One or more processors (102, 202) can generate signals (e.g., baseband signals) including PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information according to the functions, procedures, suggestions and/or methodologies disclosed herein and provide the signals to one or more transceivers (106, 206). One or more processors (102, 202) can receive signals (e.g., baseband signals) from one or more transceivers (106, 206) and obtain PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed herein.

하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 컨트롤러, 마이크로 컨트롤러, 마이크로 프로세서 또는 마이크로 컴퓨터로 지칭될 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하드웨어, 펌웨어, 소프트웨어, 또는 이들의 조합에 의해 구현될 수 있다. 일 예로, 하나 이상의 ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit), 하나 이상의 DSP(Digital Signal Processor), 하나 이상의 DSPD(Digital Signal Processing Device), 하나 이상의 PLD(Programmable Logic Device) 또는 하나 이상의 FPGA(Field Programmable Gate Arrays)가 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 포함될 수 있다. 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어를 사용하여 구현될 수 있고, 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어는 모듈, 절차, 기능 등을 포함하도록 구현될 수 있다. 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 수행하도록 설정된 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 포함되거나, 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)에 저장되어 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 의해 구동될 수 있다. 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 코드, 명령어 및/또는 명령어의 집합 형태로 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어를 사용하여 구현될 수 있다. The one or more processors (102, 202) may be referred to as a controller, a microcontroller, a microprocessor, or a microcomputer. The one or more processors (102, 202) may be implemented by hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof. For example, one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), one or more Digital Signal Processors (DSPs), one or more Digital Signal Processing Devices (DSPDs), one or more Programmable Logic Devices (PLDs), or one or more Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs) may be included in the one or more processors (102, 202). The descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software, and the firmware or software may be implemented to include modules, procedures, functions, etc. The descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software configured to perform one or more of the following: included in one or more processors (102, 202), or stored in one or more memories (104, 204) and driven by one or more of the processors (102, 202). The descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software in the form of codes, instructions and/or sets of instructions.

하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)와 연결될 수 있고, 다양한 형태의 데이터, 신호, 메시지, 정보, 프로그램, 코드, 지시 및/또는 명령을 저장할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 ROM, RAM, EPROM, 플래시 메모리, 하드 드라이브, 레지스터, 캐쉬 메모리, 컴퓨터 판독 저장 매체 및/또는 이들의 조합으로 구성될 수 있다. 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)의 내부 및/또는 외부에 위치할 수 있다. 또한, 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 유선 또는 무선 연결과 같은 다양한 기술을 통해 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)와 연결될 수 있다.One or more memories (104, 204) may be coupled to one or more processors (102, 202) and may store various forms of data, signals, messages, information, programs, codes, instructions and/or commands. The one or more memories (104, 204) may be comprised of ROM, RAM, EPROM, flash memory, hard drives, registers, cache memory, computer readable storage media and/or combinations thereof. The one or more memories (104, 204) may be located internally and/or externally to the one or more processors (102, 202). Additionally, the one or more memories (104, 204) may be coupled to the one or more processors (102, 202) via various technologies, such as wired or wireless connections.

하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 다른 장치에게 본 문서의 방법들 및/또는 동작 순서도 등에서 언급되는 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 전송할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 다른 장치로부터 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도 등에서 언급되는 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)와 연결될 수 있고, 무선 신호를 송수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)가 하나 이상의 다른 장치에게 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보 또는 무선 신호를 전송하도록 제어할 수 있다. 또한, 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)가 하나 이상의 다른 장치로부터 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보 또는 무선 신호를 수신하도록 제어할 수 있다. 또한, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 안테나(108, 208)와 연결될 수 있고, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 안테나(108, 208)를 통해 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도 등에서 언급되는 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 송수신하도록 설정될 수 있다. 본 문서에서, 하나 이상의 안테나는 복수의 물리 안테나이거나, 복수의 논리 안테나(예, 안테나 포트)일 수 있다. 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 수신된 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)를 이용하여 처리하기 위해, 수신된 무선 신호/채널 등을 RF 밴드 신호에서 베이스밴드 신호로 변환(Convert)할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)를 이용하여 처리된 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 베이스밴드 신호에서 RF 밴드 신호로 변환할 수 있다. 이를 위하여, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 (아날로그) 오실레이터 및/또는 필터를 포함할 수 있다.One or more transceivers (106, 206) can transmit user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc., as described in the methods and/or flowcharts of this document, to one or more other devices. One or more transceivers (106, 206) can receive user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc., as described in the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or flowcharts of this document, from one or more other devices. For example, one or more transceivers (106, 206) can be coupled to one or more processors (102, 202) and can transmit and receive wireless signals. For example, one or more processors (102, 202) can control one or more transceivers (106, 206) to transmit user data, control information, or wireless signals to one or more other devices. Additionally, one or more processors (102, 202) may control one or more transceivers (106, 206) to receive user data, control information, or wireless signals from one or more other devices. Additionally, one or more transceivers (106, 206) may be coupled to one or more antennas (108, 208), and one or more transceivers (106, 206) may be configured to transmit and receive user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, and the like, as described in the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed herein, via one or more antennas (108, 208). In this document, one or more antennas may be multiple physical antennas, or multiple logical antennas (e.g., antenna ports). One or more transceivers (106, 206) may convert received user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. from RF band signals to baseband signals in order to process the received user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. using one or more processors (102, 202). One or more transceivers (106, 206) may convert processed user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. from baseband signals to RF band signals using one or more processors (102, 202). For this purpose, one or more transceivers (106, 206) may include an (analog) oscillator and/or filter.

본 발명이 적용되는 무선 기기 활용 예Examples of wireless devices to which the present invention is applied

도 21은 본 발명에 적용되는 무선 기기의 다른 예를 나타낸다. 무선 기기는 사용-예/서비스에 따라 다양한 형태로 구현될 수 있다 (도 19 참조).Fig. 21 shows another example of a wireless device applied to the present invention. The wireless device can be implemented in various forms depending on the use-example/service (see Fig. 19).

도 21을 참조하면, 무선 기기(100, 200)는 도 20의 무선 기기(100,200)에 대응하며, 다양한 요소(element), 성분(component), 유닛/부(unit), 및/또는 모듈(module)로 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 무선 기기(100, 200)는 통신부(110), 제어부(120), 메모리부(130) 및 추가 요소(140)를 포함할 수 있다. 통신부는 통신 회로(112) 및 송수신기(들)(114)을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 통신 회로(112)는 도 21의 하나 이상의 프로세서(102,202) 및/또는 하나 이상의 메모리(104,204)를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 송수신기(들)(114)는 도 20의 하나 이상의 송수신기(106,206) 및/또는 하나 이상의 안테나(108,208)을 포함할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 통신부(110), 메모리부(130) 및 추가 요소(140)와 전기적으로 연결되며 무선 기기의 제반 동작을 제어한다. 예를 들어, 제어부(120)는 메모리부(130)에 저장된 프로그램/코드/명령/정보에 기반하여 무선 기기의 전기적/기계적 동작을 제어할 수 있다. 또한, 제어부(120)는 메모리부(130)에 저장된 정보를 통신부(110)을 통해 외부(예, 다른 통신 기기)로 무선/유선 인터페이스를 통해 전송하거나, 통신부(110)를 통해 외부(예, 다른 통신 기기)로부터 무선/유선 인터페이스를 통해 수신된 정보를 메모리부(130)에 저장할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 21, the wireless device (100, 200) corresponds to the wireless device (100, 200) of FIG. 20 and may be composed of various elements, components, units/units, and/or modules. For example, the wireless device (100, 200) may include a communication unit (110), a control unit (120), a memory unit (130), and an additional element (140). The communication unit may include a communication circuit (112) and a transceiver(s) (114). For example, the communication circuit (112) may include one or more processors (102, 202) and/or one or more memories (104, 204) of FIG. 21. For example, the transceiver(s) (114) may include one or more transceivers (106, 206) and/or one or more antennas (108, 208) of FIG. 20. The control unit (120) is electrically connected to the communication unit (110), the memory unit (130), and the additional elements (140) and controls overall operations of the wireless device. For example, the control unit (120) may control electrical/mechanical operations of the wireless device based on programs/codes/commands/information stored in the memory unit (130). In addition, the control unit (120) may transmit information stored in the memory unit (130) to an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface through the communication unit (110), or may store information received from an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface in the memory unit (130).

추가 요소(140)는 무선 기기의 종류에 따라 다양하게 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 추가 요소(140)는 파워 유닛/배터리, 입출력부(I/O unit), 구동부 및 컴퓨팅부 중 적어도 하나를 포함할 수 있다. 이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 무선 기기는 로봇(도 19, 100a), 차량(도 19, 100b-1, 100b-2), XR 기기(도 19, 100c), 휴대 기기(도 19, 100d), 가전(도 19, 100e), IoT 기기(도 19, 100f), 디지털 방송용 단말, 홀로그램 장치, 공공 안전 장치, MTC 장치, 의료 장치, 핀테크 장치(또는 금융 장치), 보안 장치, 기후/환경 장치, AI 서버/기기(도 19, 400), 기지국(도 19, 200), 네트워크 노드 등의 형태로 구현될 수 있다. 무선 기기는 사용-예/서비스에 따라 이동 가능하거나 고정된 장소에서 사용될 수 있다.The additional element (140) may be configured in various ways depending on the type of the wireless device. For example, the additional element (140) may include at least one of a power unit/battery, an input/output unit (I/O unit), a driving unit, and a computing unit. Although not limited thereto, the wireless device may be implemented in the form of a robot (FIG. 19, 100a), a vehicle (FIG. 19, 100b-1, 100b-2), an XR device (FIG. 19, 100c), a portable device (FIG. 19, 100d), a home appliance (FIG. 19, 100e), an IoT device (FIG. 19, 100f), a digital broadcasting terminal, a hologram device, a public safety device, an MTC device, a medical device, a fintech device (or a financial device), a security device, a climate/environmental device, an AI server/device (FIG. 19, 400), a base station (FIG. 19, 200), a network node, etc. Wireless devices may be mobile or stationary, depending on the use/service.

도 21에서 무선 기기(100, 200) 내의 다양한 요소, 성분, 유닛/부, 및/또는 모듈은 전체가 유선 인터페이스를 통해 상호 연결되거나, 적어도 일부가 통신부(110)를 통해 무선으로 연결될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 무선 기기(100, 200) 내에서 제어부(120)와 통신부(110)는 유선으로 연결되며, 제어부(120)와 제1 유닛(예, 130, 140)은 통신부(110)를 통해 무선으로 연결될 수 있다. 또한, 무선 기기(100, 200) 내의 각 요소, 성분, 유닛/부, 및/또는 모듈은 하나 이상의 요소를 더 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제어부(120)는 하나 이상의 프로세서 집합으로 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제어부(120)는 통신 제어 프로세서, 어플리케이션 프로세서(Application processor), ECU(Electronic Control Unit), 그래픽 처리 프로세서, 메모리 제어 프로세서 등의 집합으로 구성될 수 있다. 다른 예로, 메모리부(130)는 RAM(Random Access Memory), DRAM(Dynamic RAM), ROM(Read Only Memory), 플래시 메모리(flash memory), 휘발성 메모리(volatile memory), 비-휘발성 메모리(non-volatile memory) 및/또는 이들의 조합으로 구성될 수 있다.In FIG. 21, various elements, components, units/parts, and/or modules within the wireless device (100, 200) may be entirely interconnected via a wired interface, or at least some may be wirelessly connected via a communication unit (110). For example, within the wireless device (100, 200), the control unit (120) and the communication unit (110) may be wired, and the control unit (120) and the first unit (e.g., 130, 140) may be wirelessly connected via the communication unit (110). In addition, each element, component, unit/part, and/or module within the wireless device (100, 200) may further include one or more elements. For example, the control unit (120) may be composed of one or more processor sets. For example, the control unit (120) may be composed of a set of a communication control processor, an application processor, an ECU (Electronic Control Unit), a graphics processing processor, a memory control processor, etc. As another example, the memory unit (130) may be composed of RAM (Random Access Memory), DRAM (Dynamic RAM), ROM (Read Only Memory), flash memory, volatile memory, non-volatile memory, and/or a combination thereof.

본 발명이 적용되는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량 예Examples of vehicles or autonomous vehicles to which the present invention is applied

도 22는 본 발명에 적용되는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량을 예시한다. 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량은 이동형 로봇, 차량, 기차, 유/무인 비행체(Aerial Vehicle, AV), 선박 등으로 구현될 수 있다.Fig. 22 illustrates a vehicle or autonomous vehicle applied to the present invention. The vehicle or autonomous vehicle may be implemented as a mobile robot, a car, a train, a manned/unmanned aerial vehicle (AV), a ship, etc.

도 22를 참조하면, 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)은 안테나부(108), 통신부(110), 제어부(120), 구동부(140a), 전원공급부(140b), 센서부(140c) 및 자율 주행부(140d)를 포함할 수 있다. 안테나부(108)는 통신부(110)의 일부로 구성될 수 있다. 블록 110/130/140a~140d는 각각 도 21의 블록 110/130/140에 대응한다.Referring to FIG. 22, a vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) may include an antenna unit (108), a communication unit (110), a control unit (120), a driving unit (140a), a power supply unit (140b), a sensor unit (140c), and an autonomous driving unit (140d). The antenna unit (108) may be configured as a part of the communication unit (110). Blocks 110/130/140a to 140d correspond to blocks 110/130/140 of FIG. 21, respectively.

통신부(110)는 다른 차량, 기지국(e.g. 기지국, 노변 기지국(Road Side unit) 등), 서버 등의 외부 기기들과 신호(예, 데이터, 제어 신호 등)를 송수신할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)의 요소들을 제어하여 다양한 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 ECU(Electronic Control Unit)를 포함할 수 있다. 구동부(140a)는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)을 지상에서 주행하게 할 수 있다. 구동부(140a)는 엔진, 모터, 파워 트레인, 바퀴, 브레이크, 조향 장치 등을 포함할 수 있다. 전원공급부(140b)는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)에게 전원을 공급하며, 유/무선 충전 회로, 배터리 등을 포함할 수 있다. 센서부(140c)는 차량 상태, 주변 환경 정보, 사용자 정보 등을 얻을 수 있다. 센서부(140c)는 IMU(inertial measurement unit) 센서, 충돌 센서, 휠 센서(wheel sensor), 속도 센서, 경사 센서, 중량 감지 센서, 헤딩 센서(heading sensor), 포지션 모듈(position module), 차량 전진/후진 센서, 배터리 센서, 연료 센서, 타이어 센서, 스티어링 센서, 온도 센서, 습도 센서, 초음파 센서, 조도 센서, 페달 포지션 센서 등을 포함할 수 있다. 자율 주행부(140d)는 주행중인 차선을 유지하는 기술, 어댑티브 크루즈 컨트롤과 같이 속도를 자동으로 조절하는 기술, 정해진 경로를 따라 자동으로 주행하는 기술, 목적지가 설정되면 자동으로 경로를 설정하여 주행하는 기술 등을 구현할 수 있다.The communication unit (110) can transmit and receive signals (e.g., data, control signals, etc.) with external devices such as other vehicles, base stations (e.g., base stations, road side units, etc.), servers, etc. The control unit (120) can control elements of the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) to perform various operations. The control unit (120) can include an ECU (Electronic Control Unit). The drive unit (140a) can drive the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) on the ground. The drive unit (140a) can include an engine, a motor, a power train, wheels, brakes, a steering device, etc. The power supply unit (140b) supplies power to the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) and can include a wired/wireless charging circuit, a battery, etc. The sensor unit (140c) can obtain vehicle status, surrounding environment information, user information, etc. The sensor unit (140c) may include an IMU (inertial measurement unit) sensor, a collision sensor, a wheel sensor, a speed sensor, an incline sensor, a weight detection sensor, a heading sensor, a position module, a vehicle forward/backward sensor, a battery sensor, a fuel sensor, a tire sensor, a steering sensor, a temperature sensor, a humidity sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, a pedal position sensor, etc. The autonomous driving unit (140d) may implement a technology for maintaining a driving lane, a technology for automatically controlling speed such as adaptive cruise control, a technology for automatically driving along a set path, a technology for automatically setting a path and driving when a destination is set, etc.

일 예로, 통신부(110)는 외부 서버로부터 지도 데이터, 교통 정보 데이터 등을 수신할 수 있다. 자율 주행부(140d)는 획득된 데이터를 기반으로 자율 주행 경로와 드라이빙 플랜을 생성할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 드라이빙 플랜에 따라 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)이 자율 주행 경로를 따라 이동하도록 구동부(140a)를 제어할 수 있다(예, 속도/방향 조절). 자율 주행 도중에 통신부(110)는 외부 서버로부터 최신 교통 정보 데이터를 비/주기적으로 획득하며, 주변 차량으로부터 주변 교통 정보 데이터를 획득할 수 있다. 또한, 자율 주행 도중에 센서부(140c)는 차량 상태, 주변 환경 정보를 획득할 수 있다. 자율 주행부(140d)는 새로 획득된 데이터/정보에 기반하여 자율 주행 경로와 드라이빙 플랜을 갱신할 수 있다. 통신부(110)는 차량 위치, 자율 주행 경로, 드라이빙 플랜 등에 관한 정보를 외부 서버로 전달할 수 있다. 외부 서버는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량들로부터 수집된 정보에 기반하여, AI 기술 등을 이용하여 교통 정보 데이터를 미리 예측할 수 있고, 예측된 교통 정보 데이터를 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량들에게 제공할 수 있다.For example, the communication unit (110) can receive map data, traffic information data, etc. from an external server. The autonomous driving unit (140d) can generate an autonomous driving route and a driving plan based on the acquired data. The control unit (120) can control the driving unit (140a) so that the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) moves along the autonomous driving route according to the driving plan (e.g., speed/direction control). During autonomous driving, the communication unit (110) can irregularly/periodically acquire the latest traffic information data from an external server and can acquire surrounding traffic information data from surrounding vehicles. In addition, the sensor unit (140c) can acquire vehicle status and surrounding environment information during autonomous driving. The autonomous driving unit (140d) can update the autonomous driving route and driving plan based on the newly acquired data/information. The communication unit (110) can transmit information on the vehicle location, autonomous driving route, driving plan, etc. to an external server. An external server can predict traffic information data in advance using AI technology, etc. based on information collected from vehicles or autonomous vehicles, and provide the predicted traffic information data to the vehicles or autonomous vehicles.

여기서, 본 명세서의 무선 기기(XXX, YYY)에서 구현되는 무선 통신 기술은 LTE, NR 및 6G뿐만 아니라 저전력 통신을 위한 Narrowband Internet of Things를 포함할 수 있다. 이때, 예를 들어 NB-IoT 기술은 LPWAN(Low Power Wide Area Network) 기술의 일례일 수 있고, LTE Cat NB1 및/또는 LTE Cat NB2 등의 규격으로 구현될 수 있으며, 상술한 명칭에 한정되는 것은 아니다. 추가적으로 또는 대체적으로, 본 명세서의 무선 기기(XXX, YYY)에서 구현되는 무선 통신 기술은 LTE-M 기술을 기반으로 통신을 수행할 수 있다. 이때, 일 예로, LTE-M 기술은 LPWAN 기술의 일례일 수 있고, eMTC(enhanced Machine Type Communication) 등의 다양한 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다. 예를 들어, LTE-M 기술은 1) LTE CAT 0, 2) LTE Cat M1, 3) LTE Cat M2, 4) LTE non-BL(non-Bandwidth Limited), 5) LTE-MTC, 6) LTE Machine Type Communication, 및/또는 7) LTE M 등의 다양한 규격 중 적어도 어느 하나로 구현될 수 있으며 상술한 명칭에 한정되는 것은 아니다. 추가적으로 또는 대체적으로, 본 명세서의 무선 기기(XXX, YYY)에서 구현되는 무선 통신 기술은 저전력 통신을 고려한 지그비(ZigBee), 블루투스(Bluetooth) 및 저전력 광역 통신망(Low Power Wide Area Network, LPWAN) 중 적어도 어느 하나를 포함할 수 있으며, 상술한 명칭에 한정되는 것은 아니다. 일 예로 ZigBee 기술은 IEEE 802.15.4 등의 다양한 규격을 기반으로 소형/저-파워 디지털 통신에 관련된 PAN(personal area networks)을 생성할 수 있으며, 다양한 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다.Here, the wireless communication technology implemented in the wireless device (XXX, YYY) of the present specification may include LTE, NR, and 6G, as well as Narrowband Internet of Things for low-power communication. At this time, for example, NB-IoT technology may be an example of LPWAN (Low Power Wide Area Network) technology, and may be implemented with standards such as LTE Cat NB1 and/or LTE Cat NB2, and is not limited to the above-described names. Additionally or alternatively, the wireless communication technology implemented in the wireless device (XXX, YYY) of the present specification may perform communication based on LTE-M technology. At this time, for example, LTE-M technology may be an example of LPWAN technology, and may be called by various names such as eMTC (enhanced Machine Type Communication). For example, the LTE-M technology can be implemented by at least one of various standards such as 1) LTE CAT 0, 2) LTE Cat M1, 3) LTE Cat M2, 4) LTE non-BL (non-Bandwidth Limited), 5) LTE-MTC, 6) LTE Machine Type Communication, and/or 7) LTE M, and is not limited to the above-described names. Additionally or alternatively, the wireless communication technology implemented in the wireless device (XXX, YYY) of the present specification can include at least one of ZigBee, Bluetooth, and Low Power Wide Area Network (LPWAN) considering low-power communication, and is not limited to the above-described names. For example, the ZigBee technology can create PAN (personal area networks) related to small/low-power digital communication based on various standards such as IEEE 802.15.4, and can be called by various names.

이상에서 설명된 실시예들은 본 발명의 구성요소들과 특징들이 소정 형태로 결합된 것들이다. 각 구성요소 또는 특징은 별도의 명시적 언급이 없는 한 선택적인 것으로 고려되어야 한다. 각 구성요소 또는 특징은 다른 구성요소나 특징과 결합되지 않은 형태로 실시될 수 있다. 또한, 일부 구성요소들 및/또는 특징들을 결합하여 본 발명의 실시예를 구성하는 것도 가능하다. 본 발명의 실시예들에서 설명되는 동작들의 순서는 변경될 수 있다. 어느 실시예의 일부 구성이나 특징은 다른 실시예에 포함될 수 있고, 또는 다른 실시예의 대응하는 구성 또는 특징과 교체될 수 있다. 특허청구범위에서 명시적인 인용 관계가 있지 않은 청구항들을 결합하여 실시예를 구성하거나 출원 후의 보정에 의해 새로운 청구항으로 포함시킬 수 있음은 자명하다.The embodiments described above are combinations of components and features of the present invention in a predetermined form. Each component or feature should be considered optional unless explicitly stated otherwise. Each component or feature may be implemented in a form that is not combined with other components or features. In addition, it is also possible to form an embodiment of the present invention by combining some components and/or features. The order of operations described in the embodiments of the present invention may be changed. Some components or features of one embodiment may be included in another embodiment, or may be replaced with corresponding components or features of another embodiment. It is obvious that claims that do not have an explicit citation relationship in the scope of the patent may be combined to form an embodiment or included as a new claim by post-application amendment.

본 문서에서 본 발명의 실시예들은 주로 단말과 기지국 간의 신호 송수신 관계를 중심으로 설명되었다. 이러한 송수신 관계는 단말과 릴레이 또는 기지국과 릴레이간의 신호 송수신에도 동일/유사하게 확장된다. 본 문서에서 기지국에 의해 수행된다고 설명된 특정 동작은 경우에 따라서는 그 상위 노드(upper node)에 의해 수행될 수 있다. 즉, 기지국을 포함하는 복수의 네트워크 노드들(network nodes)로 이루어지는 네트워크에서 단말과의 통신을 위해 수행되는 다양한 동작들은 기지국 또는 기지국 이외의 다른 네트워크 노드들에 의해 수행될 수 있음은 자명하다. 기지국은 고정국(fixed station), Node B, eNode B(eNB), 억세스 포인트(access point) 등의 용어에 의해 대체될 수 있다. 또한, 단말은 UE(User Equipment), MS(Mobile Station), MSS(Mobile Subscriber Station) 등의 용어로 대체될 수 있다.In this document, the embodiments of the present invention have been mainly described with a focus on the signal transmission/reception relationship between a terminal and a base station. This transmission/reception relationship is equally/similarly extended to signal transmission/reception between a terminal and a relay or a base station and a relay. A specific operation described as being performed by a base station in this document may, in some cases, be performed by its upper node. That is, it is obvious that various operations performed for communication with a terminal in a network composed of a plurality of network nodes including a base station may be performed by the base station or other network nodes other than the base station. The base station may be replaced with terms such as a fixed station, a Node B, an eNode B (eNB), an access point, etc. In addition, the terminal may be replaced with terms such as a UE (User Equipment), an MS (Mobile Station), an MSS (Mobile Subscriber Station), etc.

본 발명에 따른 실시예는 다양한 수단, 예를 들어, 하드웨어, 펌웨어(firmware), 소프트웨어 또는 그것들의 결합 등에 의해 구현될 수 있다. 하드웨어에 의한 구현의 경우, 본 발명의 일 실시예는 하나 또는 그 이상의 ASICs(application specific integrated circuits), DSPs(digital signal processors), DSPDs(digital signal processing devices), PLDs(programmable logic devices), FPGAs(field programmable gate arrays), 프로세서, 콘트롤러, 마이크로 콘트롤러, 마이크로 프로세서 등에 의해 구현될 수 있다.Embodiments according to the present invention can be implemented by various means, for example, hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof. In case of implementation by hardware, an embodiment of the present invention can be implemented by one or more ASICs (application specific integrated circuits), DSPs (digital signal processors), DSPDs (digital signal processing devices), PLDs (programmable logic devices), FPGAs (field programmable gate arrays), processors, controllers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, etc.

펌웨어나 소프트웨어에 의한 구현의 경우, 본 발명의 일 실시예는 이상에서 설명된 기능 또는 동작들을 수행하는 모듈, 절차, 함수 등의 형태로 구현될 수 있다. 소프트웨어 코드는 메모리 유닛에 저장되어 프로세서에 의해 구동될 수 있다. 상기 메모리 유닛은 상기 프로세서 내부 또는 외부에 위치하여, 이미 공지된 다양한 수단에 의해 상기 프로세서와 데이터를 주고받을 수 있다.In the case of implementation by firmware or software, one embodiment of the present invention may be implemented in the form of a module, procedure, function, etc. that performs the functions or operations described above. The software code may be stored in a memory unit and may be driven by a processor. The memory unit may be located inside or outside the processor and may exchange data with the processor by various means already known.

본 발명은 본 발명의 특징을 벗어나지 않는 범위에서 다른 특정한 형태로 구체화될 수 있음은 당업자에게 자명하다. 따라서, 상기의 상세한 설명은 모든 면에서 제한적으로 해석되어서는 아니되고 예시적인 것으로 고려되어야 한다. 본 발명의 범위는 첨부된 청구항의 합리적 해석에 의해 결정되어야 하고, 본 발명의 등가적 범위 내에서의 모든 변경은 본 발명의 범위에 포함된다.It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the present invention can be embodied in other specific forms without departing from the scope of the present invention. Therefore, the above detailed description should not be construed as limiting in all aspects, but should be considered as illustrative. The scope of the present invention should be determined by a reasonable interpretation of the appended claims, and all changes within the equivalent scope of the present invention are included in the scope of the present invention.

상술한 바와 같은 본 발명의 실시형태들은 다양한 이동통신 시스템에 적용될 수 있다.The embodiments of the present invention as described above can be applied to various mobile communication systems.

Claims (15)

무선 통신 시스템에서 제1 릴레이 단말이 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 수행하는 방법에 있어서,In a method for a first relay terminal to perform multi-hop based relaying in a wireless communication system, 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 위한 제1 홉 연결 및 제2 홉 연결을 형성하는 단계;A step of forming a first-hop connection and a second-hop connection for the multi-hop based relay; 상기 제1 홉 연결 또는 상기 제2 홉 연결에 대한 RLF (Radio Link Failure) 발생 여부를 모니터링하는 단계; 및A step of monitoring whether RLF (Radio Link Failure) occurs for the first hop connection or the second hop connection; and 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결 중 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 RLF가 발생한 것에 기초하여, 상기 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차를 트리거하는 단계를 포함하는, 방법.A method comprising the step of triggering a reselection procedure of a relay terminal for one of the first hop connection and the second hop connection based on the occurrence of an RLF for the one hop connection. 제1항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 미리 설정된 시간 내에 상기 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차를 통한 새로운 릴레이 단말이 탐색되지 않은 것에 기초하여, 상기 제1 릴레이 단말은 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결 중 상기 RLF가 감지되지 않은 홉 연결을 통해 상기 하나의 홉 연결의 RLF 감지에 대한 RLF 감지 정보를 보고하는 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method characterized in that, based on the fact that a new relay terminal is not discovered through a reselection procedure of the relay terminal within a preset time, the first relay terminal reports RLF detection information for RLF detection of the one hop connection through a hop connection in which the RLF is not detected among the first hop connection and the second hop connection. 제2항에 있어서,In the second paragraph, 상기 RLF 감지 정보는 상기 하나의 홉 연결에 대응하는 홉 넘버의 값을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method, characterized in that the RLF detection information includes a value of a hop number corresponding to the one hop connection. 제2항에 있어서,In the second paragraph, 상기 RLF 감지 정보는 상기 RLF가 감지되지 않은 홉 연결을 해제하기 위한 해제 메시지를 통해 보고되고,The above RLF detection information is reported through a release message to release the hop connection where the RLF is not detected, 상기 해제 메시지는 상기 RLF의 감지를 원인 값으로 설정된 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method, characterized in that the above release message is set to a cause value for detection of the RLF. 제1항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결 중 상기 RLF가 감지되지 않은 홉 연결이 소스 리모트 단말 또는 네트워크와 형성된 것에 기초하여, 상기 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차는 트리거되지 않은 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method characterized in that the reselection procedure of the relay terminal is not triggered based on the fact that a hop connection in which the RLF is not detected among the first hop connection and the second hop connection is formed with the source remote terminal or the network. 제5항에 있어서,In paragraph 5, 상기 제1 릴레이 단말은 상기 하나의 홉 연결의 RLF 감지에 대한 RLF 감지 정보를 상기 소스 리모트 단말 또는 상기 네트워크에 보고하는 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method characterized in that the first relay terminal reports RLF detection information for RLF detection of the one hop connection to the source remote terminal or the network. 제1항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 상기 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차를 통해 새로운 릴레이 단말과 상기 하나의 홉 연결을 재형성하는 단계; 및A step of re-establishing a one-hop connection with a new relay terminal through a re-selection procedure of the relay terminal; and 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결 중 상기 RLF가 감지되지 않은 홉 연결을 통해 상기 하나의 홉 연결의 재형성에 대한 정보를 보고하는 단계를 더 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method characterized by further comprising a step of reporting information on the re-establishment of the one hop connection through a hop connection in which the RLF is not detected among the first hop connection and the second hop connection. 제7항에 있어서,In Article 7, 상기 하나의 홉 연결의 재형성에 대한 정보는 상기 하나의 홉 연결의 재형성으로 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 위한 전체 홉 수가 증가한 경우에만 보고되는 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method, characterized in that information about the re-establishment of said one-hop connection is reported only when the total number of hops for said multi-hop based relay increases due to the re-establishment of said one-hop connection. 제1항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이는 리모트 단말과 네트워크 간의 데이터를 송수신하기 위한 U2N (User equipment to Network) 릴레이인 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method, characterized in that the above multi-hop based relay is a U2N (User equipment to Network) relay for transmitting and receiving data between a remote terminal and a network. 제1항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이는 소스 리모트 단말과 타겟 리모트 단말 간의 데이터를 송수신하기 위한 U2U (User equipment to User equipment) 릴레이인 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method, characterized in that the above multi-hop based relay is a U2U (User equipment to User equipment) relay for transmitting and receiving data between a source remote terminal and a target remote terminal. 제1항에 기재된 방법을 수행하기 위한 프로그램을 기록한 컴퓨터로 읽을 수 있는 기록 매체.A computer-readable recording medium having recorded thereon a program for performing the method described in claim 1. 무선 통신 시스템에서 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 수행하는 제1 릴레이 단말에 있어서,In a first relay terminal performing multi-hop based relay in a wireless communication system, RF(Radio Frequency) 송수신기; 및RF(Radio Frequency) transceiver; and 상기 RF 송수신기와 연결되는 프로세서를 포함하고,comprising a processor connected to the RF transceiver; 상기 프로세서는 상기 RF 송수신기를 제어하여 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 위한 제1 홉 연결 및 제2 홉 연결을 형성하고, 상기 제1 홉 연결 또는 상기 제2 홉 연결에 대한 RLF (Radio Link Failure) 발생 여부를 모니터링하며, 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결 중 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 RLF가 발생한 것에 기초하여, 상기 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차를 트리거하는, 제1 릴레이 단말.A first relay terminal, wherein the processor controls the RF transceiver to form a first hop connection and a second hop connection for the multi-hop based relay, monitors whether an RLF (Radio Link Failure) occurs for the first hop connection or the second hop connection, and triggers a reselection procedure of the relay terminal for one of the first hop connection and the second hop connection based on the occurrence of an RLF for the one hop connection. 제12항에 있어서,In Article 12, 미리 설정된 시간 내에 상기 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차를 통한 새로운 릴레이 단말이 탐색되지 않은 것에 기초하여, 상기 프로세서는 상기 RF 송수신기를 제어하여 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결 중 상기 RLF가 감지되지 않은 홉 연결을 통해 상기 하나의 홉 연결의 RLF 감지에 대한 RLF 감지 정보를 보고하는 것을 특징으로 하는, 제1 릴레이 단말.A first relay terminal, characterized in that, based on the fact that a new relay terminal is not discovered through a reselection procedure of the relay terminal within a preset time, the processor controls the RF transceiver to report RLF detection information for RLF detection of the one hop connection through the hop connection in which the RLF is not detected among the first hop connection and the second hop connection. 제13항에 있어서,In Article 13, 상기 RLF 감지 정보는 상기 하나의 홉 연결에 대응하는 홉 넘버의 값을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는, 제1 릴레이 단말.A first relay terminal, characterized in that the RLF detection information includes a value of a hop number corresponding to the one hop connection. 무선 통신 시스템에서 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 수행하는 제1 릴레이 단말을 제어하는 프로세싱 장치에 있어서,In a processing device for controlling a first relay terminal performing multi-hop based relay in a wireless communication system, 적어도 하나의 프로세서; 및at least one processor; and 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 연결되고 명령어들을 저장하는 적어도 하나의 메모리를 포함하되, 상기 명령어들은 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 의해 실행되는 것을 기반으로 상기 제1 릴레이 단말로 하여금:At least one memory coupled to said at least one processor and storing instructions, said instructions causing said first relay terminal to: 상기 멀티 홉 기반 릴레이를 위한 제1 홉 연결 및 제2 홉 연결을 형성하고, 상기 제1 홉 연결 또는 상기 제2 홉 연결에 대한 RLF (Radio Link Failure) 발생 여부를 모니터링하며, 상기 제1 홉 연결 및 상기 제2 홉 연결 중 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 RLF가 발생한 것에 기초하여, 상기 하나의 홉 연결에 대한 릴레이 단말의 재선택 절차를 트리거하게 하는, 프로세싱 장치.A processing device configured to form a first hop connection and a second hop connection for the multi-hop based relay, monitor whether an RLF (Radio Link Failure) occurs for the first hop connection or the second hop connection, and trigger a reselection procedure of a relay terminal for one of the first hop connection and the second hop connection based on the occurrence of an RLF for the one hop connection.
PCT/KR2024/009203 2023-07-04 2024-07-01 Method for performing relay communication and device therefor in wireless communication system Pending WO2025009823A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR20230086674 2023-07-04
KR10-2023-0086674 2023-07-04

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025009823A1 true WO2025009823A1 (en) 2025-01-09

Family

ID=94171957

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2024/009203 Pending WO2025009823A1 (en) 2023-07-04 2024-07-01 Method for performing relay communication and device therefor in wireless communication system

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025009823A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20130084858A (en) * 2012-01-18 2013-07-26 강원대학교산학협력단 Multi-hop wireless network using opportunistic routing scheme and communication method using the network
KR101924838B1 (en) * 2012-08-10 2018-12-05 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for 2 hop link communication in wireless communication networks
WO2021236786A1 (en) * 2020-05-19 2021-11-25 Convida Wireless, Llc Sidelink adaptation protocol for remote ue connectivity
CN115706989A (en) * 2021-08-10 2023-02-17 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Terminal access method, device, terminal and storage medium
KR20230035038A (en) * 2020-06-19 2023-03-10 프라운호퍼-게젤샤프트 추르 푀르데룽 데어 안제반텐 포르슝 에 파우 Proximity-based service remote and transit entity quality of service management

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20130084858A (en) * 2012-01-18 2013-07-26 강원대학교산학협력단 Multi-hop wireless network using opportunistic routing scheme and communication method using the network
KR101924838B1 (en) * 2012-08-10 2018-12-05 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for 2 hop link communication in wireless communication networks
WO2021236786A1 (en) * 2020-05-19 2021-11-25 Convida Wireless, Llc Sidelink adaptation protocol for remote ue connectivity
KR20230035038A (en) * 2020-06-19 2023-03-10 프라운호퍼-게젤샤프트 추르 푀르데룽 데어 안제반텐 포르슝 에 파우 Proximity-based service remote and transit entity quality of service management
CN115706989A (en) * 2021-08-10 2023-02-17 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Terminal access method, device, terminal and storage medium

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2024191263A1 (en) Method by which terminal performs communication in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2025009823A1 (en) Method for performing relay communication and device therefor in wireless communication system
WO2025014156A1 (en) Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system and device therefor
WO2025009822A1 (en) Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2025014347A1 (en) Operating method related to rlf in multi-hop ue-to-ue relay, and device therefor
WO2025014268A1 (en) Operation method related to qos in multi-hop ue-to-ue relay and device therefor
WO2025018736A1 (en) Operation method related to emergency service in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
WO2025033856A1 (en) Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2024205337A1 (en) Method by which terminal establishes communication in wireless communication system and device therefor
WO2025071167A1 (en) Method related to reporting information indicating connection relationship of multi-hop relay and device therefor
WO2024191226A2 (en) Communication method for terminal to communicate and device therefor in wireless communication system
WO2025058404A1 (en) Method for performing communication in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2025018842A1 (en) Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2025170301A1 (en) Method and device for performing relay communication in wireless communication system
WO2025071168A1 (en) Method related to measurement report triggering in multi-hop relay and device therefor
WO2025173982A1 (en) Method for performing communication and device therefor in wireless communication system
WO2025063830A1 (en) Method related to threshold for multi-hop relay operation and device therefor
WO2025234687A1 (en) Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2024196154A2 (en) Method by which user equipment performs communication in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2025063822A1 (en) Method for performing communication in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
WO2025198335A1 (en) Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor
WO2025206693A1 (en) Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2025198336A1 (en) Method and device for performing relay communication in wireless communication system
WO2025023709A1 (en) Method for configuring connection in consideration of pdb separation in multi-hop u2u operation and device therefor
WO2025084876A1 (en) Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24836271

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1